WO2012039787A1 - 2' -fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment - Google Patents

2' -fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2012039787A1
WO2012039787A1 PCT/US2011/028897 US2011028897W WO2012039787A1 WO 2012039787 A1 WO2012039787 A1 WO 2012039787A1 US 2011028897 W US2011028897 W US 2011028897W WO 2012039787 A1 WO2012039787 A1 WO 2012039787A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
alkyl
another aspect
compound
independently
formula
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2011/028897
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Aesop Cho
Choung Kim
Adrian Ray
Original Assignee
Gilead Sciences, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=44275983&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=WO2012039787(A1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by Gilead Sciences, Inc. filed Critical Gilead Sciences, Inc.
Publication of WO2012039787A1 publication Critical patent/WO2012039787A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H13/00—Compounds containing saccharide radicals esterified by carbonic acid or derivatives thereof, or by organic acids, e.g. phosphonic acids
    • C07H13/02—Compounds containing saccharide radicals esterified by carbonic acid or derivatives thereof, or by organic acids, e.g. phosphonic acids by carboxylic acids
    • C07H13/08—Compounds containing saccharide radicals esterified by carbonic acid or derivatives thereof, or by organic acids, e.g. phosphonic acids by carboxylic acids having the esterifying carboxyl radicals directly attached to carbocyclic rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07H—SUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H7/00—Compounds containing non-saccharide radicals linked to saccharide radicals by a carbon-to-carbon bond
    • C07H7/06—Heterocyclic radicals

Definitions

  • the invention relates generally to compounds with antiviral activity, more particularly nucleosides active against Flaviviridae infections and most particularly to inhibitors of hepatitis C virus RNA-dependent RNA polymerase.
  • Viruses comprising the Flaviviridae family comprise at least three distinguishable genera including pestiviruses, flaviviruses, and hepaciviruses (Calisher, et al, J. Gen. Virol, 1993, 70, 37-43). While pestiviruses cause many economically important animal diseases such as bovine viral diarrhea virus (BVDV), classical swine fever virus (CSFV, hog cholera) and border disease of sheep (BDV), their importance in human disease is less well characterized (Moennig, V., et al, Adv. Vir. Res. 1992, 48, 53-98).
  • BVDV bovine viral diarrhea virus
  • CSFV classical swine fever virus
  • BDV border disease of sheep
  • Flaviviruses are responsible for important human diseases such as dengue fever and yellow fever while hepaciviruses cause hepatitis C virus infections in humans.
  • Other important viral infections caused by the Flaviviridae family include West Nile virus (WNV) Japanese encephalitis virus (JEV), tick-borne encephalitis virus, Junjin virus, Murray Valley encephalitis, St Louis encephalitis, Omsk hemorrhagic fever virus and Zika virus.
  • WNV West Nile virus
  • JEV Japanese encephalitis virus
  • JEV Japanese encephalitis virus
  • Junjin virus Junjin virus
  • Murray Valley encephalitis Junjin virus
  • St Louis encephalitis encephalitis
  • Omsk hemorrhagic fever virus Zika virus.
  • infections from the Flaviviridae virus family cause significant mortality, morbidity and economic losses throughout the world. Therefore, there is a need to develop effective treatments for Flaviviridae virus infections.
  • HCV hepatitis C virus
  • RNA-dependent RNA polymerase (RdRp) is one of the best studied targets for the development of novel HCV therapeutic agents.
  • the NS5B polymerase is a target
  • ribavirin a nucleoside analog
  • IFN interferon-alpha
  • Ribavirin alone is not effective in reducing viral RNA levels, 5 has significant toxicity, and is known to induce anemia.
  • the combination of IFN and ribavirin has been reported to be effective in the management of chronic hepatitis C (Scott, L. J., et al. Drugs 2002, 62, 507-556) but less than half the patients infected with some genotypes show a persistent benefit when given this treatment.
  • Other patent applications disclosing the use of nucleoside analogs to treat hepatitis C virus 0 include WO 01/32153, WO 01/60315, WO 02/057425, WO 02/057287, WO
  • HCV infection Virologic cures of patients with chronic HCV infection are difficult to achieve because of the prodigious amount of daily virus production in chronically infected patients and the high spontaneous mutability of HCV virus (Neumann, et al., Science 1998, 282, 103-7; Fukimoto, et al, Hepatology, 1996, 24, 1351-4; Domingo, et al, Gene, 1985, 40, 1-8; Martell, et al., J. Virol. 1992, 66, 3225-9.
  • Ribosides of pyrrolo[l,2-fJ[l,2,4]triazinyl, imidazo[l,5-fj[l,2,4]triazinyl, imidazo[l,2-fJ[l,2,4]triazinyl, and [l,2,4]triazolo[4,3-f][l,2,4]triazinyl nucleobases with antiviral, anti-HCV, and anti-RdRp activity have been disclosed by Babu, Y. S., WO2008/089105 and WO2008/141079; Cho, et al, WO2009/132123 and Francom, et al. WO2010/002877.
  • the invention also comprises compounds of Formula I or Formula IV-VI that inhibit viral nucleic acid polymerases, particularly HCV NA-dependent RNA polymerase (RdRp), rather than cellular nucleic acid polymerases.
  • RdRp HCV NA-dependent RNA polymerase
  • the compounds of Formula I or Formula IV-VI have been discovered to be efficacious against both wild type and S282T mutant strains of HCV virus. Therefore, a compound of Formula I or Formula IV-VI are useful for treating Flaviviridae infections in humans and other animals.
  • R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C 4 -C 8 )carbocyclylalkyl, alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )substituted alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl, (C 2 -C 8 )substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-Cg)alkyl;
  • R 2 is halogen
  • each R 3 , R 4 , or R 5 is independently H, OR", N(R a ) 2 , N 3 , CN, NC3 ⁇ 4 S(0) consentR a , halogen, (Ci-C 8 )alkyl, (C4 ⁇ C 8 )carbocyclylalkyl, (Ci-C 8 )substituted alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )substituted alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl, (C 2 -C 8 )substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-C 8 )alkyl; or any two of R 3 , R 4 or R S on adjacent carbon atoms when taken together are -
  • each n is independently 0, 1 , or 2;
  • each Y or Y 1 is, independently, O, S, NR, + N(0)(R), N(OR), + N(0)(OR), or N-NR 2 ;
  • W 1 and W 2 when taken together, are -Y 3 (C(R y )2) 3 Y 3 S or one of W 1 or W 2 together with either R 3 or R 4 is -Y 3 - and the other of W 1 or W 2 is Formula la; or W 1
  • each Y 2 is independently a bond, O, CR 2 , NR, + N(0)(R), N(OR), + N(0)(OR), N-NR 2 , S, S-S, S(O), or S(0) 2 ;
  • each Y 3 is independently O, S, or NR;
  • M2 is 0, 1 or 2;
  • each R is independently R y or the formula:
  • each Mia, Ml c, and Mid is independently 0 or 1;
  • M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;
  • each R is independently H, (Ci-C 8 ) alkyl, (Ci substituted alkyl, (Cj- C 8 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) substituted alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) alkynyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) substituted alkynyl, -C 2 o aryl, -C 2 o substituted aryl, C 2 -C 20 heterocyclyl, C 2 -C 2 o substituted heterocyclyl, arylalkyl or substituted arylalkyl;
  • W 3 is W 4 or W 5 ;
  • W 4 is R, -C(Y')R y , -C(Y')W 5 , -S0 2 R y , or -S0 2 W 5 ; and
  • W 5 is a carbocycle or a heterocycle wherein W 5 is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R groups;
  • each X 1 or X 2 is independently C-R 10 or N; each R 8 is halogen, NR"R' 2 , N(R n )OR H , NR u NR n R 12 , N 3> NO, N0 2 , CHO,
  • each R 9 or R 10 is independently H, halogen, NR"R 12 , N(R n )OR n ,
  • each (Ci-C 8 )alkyl, (C2-C 8 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl or aryl(Ci-C 8 )alkyl of each R 1 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 11 or R 12 is, independently, optionally substituted with one or more halo, hydroxy, CN, N3, N(R a ) 2 or OR a ; and wherein one or more of the nonterminal carbon atoms of each said (Ci-C 8 )alkyl may be optionally replaced with -0-, -S- or -NR a -.
  • novel compounds of Formula I or Formula IV- VI with activity against infectious Flaviviridae viruses may inhibit viral RNA- dependent RNA polymerase and thus inhibit the replication of the virus. They are useful for treating human patients infected with a human virus such as hepatitis C.
  • pharmaceutical compositions comprising an effective amount of a Formula I or a Formula IV- VI compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier.
  • the present application provides for combination pharmaceutical agent comprising:
  • a) a first pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula I or Formula IV- VI; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof;
  • a second pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one additional therapeutic agent selected from the group consisting of interferons, ribavirin or its analogs, HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha- glucosidase 1 inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, antagonists of the renin-angiotensin system, other anti-fibrotic agents, endothelin antagonists, nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, non- nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, HCV NS5A inhibitors, TLR-7 agonists, cyclophillin inhibitors, HCV IRES inhibitors, pharmacokinetic enhancers and other drugs for treating HCV; or mixtures thereof.
  • additional therapeutic agent selected from the group consisting of interferons, ribavirin or its analogs, HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitor
  • the present application provides for a method of inhibiting HCV polymerase, comprising contacting a cell infected with HCV with an effective amount of a compound of Formula I or Formula IV-VI; or a
  • the present application provides for a method of inhibiting HCV polymerase, comprising contacting a cell infected with HCV with an effective amount of a compound of Formula I or Formula IV-VI; or a
  • the present application provides for a method of treating and/or preventing a disease caused by a viral infection wherein the viral infection is caused by a virus selected from the group consisting of dengue virus, yellow fever virus, West Nile virus, Japanese encephalitis virus, tick-borne encephalitis virus, Junjin virus, Murray Valley encephalitis virus, St Louis encephalitis virus, Omsk hemorrhagic fever virus, bovine viral diarrhea virus, Zika virus and Hepatitis C virus; by administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I or Formula IV- VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • a virus selected from the group consisting of dengue virus, yellow fever virus, West Nile virus, Japanese encephalitis virus, tick-borne encephalitis virus, Junjin virus, Murray Valley encephalitis virus, St Louis encephalitis virus, Omsk hemorrhagic fever virus, bovine viral diarrhea virus, Zika virus and Hepatitis C virus
  • the present application provides for a method of treating HCV in a patient, comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I or Formula IV- VI; or a
  • the present application provides for a method of treating HCV in a patient, comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I or Formula IV- VI; or a
  • Another aspect of the invention provides a method for the treatment or prevention of the symptoms or effects of an HCV infection in an infected animal which comprises administering to, i.e. treating, said animal with a pharmaceutical combination composition or formulation comprising an effective amount of a Formula I compound or Formula IV- VI, and a second compound having anti-HCV properties.
  • the invention also provides a method of inhibiting HCV, comprising administering to a mammal infected with HCV an amount of a Formula I or Formula IV- VI compound, effective to inhibit the replication of HCV in infected cells in said mammal.
  • a compound of Formula I or Formula IV- VI for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of Flaviviridae viral infections.
  • a compound of Formula I or Formula IV- VI for use in treating a Flaviviridae viral infection.
  • the Flaviviridae viral infection is acute or chronic HCV infection.
  • the treatment results in the reduction of one or more of the viral loads or clearance of RNA in the patient.
  • the invention also provides processes and novel intermediates disclosed herein which are useful for preparing Formula I or Formula IV- VI compounds of the invention.
  • novel methods for synthesis, analysis, separation, isolation, purification, characterization, and testing of the compounds of this invention are provided.
  • R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C 4 -C 8 )carbocyclylalkyl, (Ci-C 8 )-ubstituted alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )substituted alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl, (C 2 -C 8 )substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-C 8 )alkyl;
  • each R 3 , R 4 , or R 5 is independently H, OR a , N(R a ) 3 ⁇ 4 N 3 , CN, N0 2 , S(0) consentR a , halogen, (Ci-C 8 )alkyl, (C4-C 8 )carbocyclylalkyl, (Ci-Cs)substituted alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )substituted alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl, (C 2 -C 8 )substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-C 8 )alkyl;
  • R 3 , R 4 or R 5 on adjacent carbon atoms when taken together are - 0(CO)0- or when taken together with the ring carbon atoms to which they are attached form a double bond;
  • each n is independently 0, 1 , or 2;
  • each Y or Y 1 is, independently, O, S, NR, + N(0)(R), N(OR), + N(0)(OR), or N-NR 2 ;
  • W 1 and W 2 when taken togedier, are -Y 3 (C(R y ) 2 ) 3 Y S or one of W 1 or W 2 together with either R 3 or R 4 is -Y 3 - and the other of W 1 or W 2 is Formula la; or W and W 2 are each, independentl Formula la:
  • each Y 2 is independently a bond, O, CR 2 , NR, + N(0)(R), N(OR), + N(0)(OR), N-NR 2 , S, S-S, S(O), or S(0) 2 ;
  • each Y 3 is independently O, S, or NR;
  • M2 is 0, 1 or 2;
  • each R x is independently R y or the formula:
  • each Mia, Mlc, and Mid is independently 0 or 1 ;
  • M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;
  • each R is independently H, (Ci-C 8 ) alkyl, (Ci-Cg) substituted alkyl, (C 2 - Cg)alkenyl, (C2-Cg) substituted alkenyl, (C2-Q) alkynyl, (C -Cg) substituted alkynyl, C6-C20 aryl, C 6 -C 2 o substituted aryl, C2-C20 heterocyclyl, C2-C20 substituted heterocyclyl, arylalkyl or substituted arylalkyl;
  • W 3 is W 4 or W 5 ;
  • W 4 is R, -C ⁇ VC, -C(Y')W S , -S0 2 R Y , or -S0 2 W 5 ; and
  • W 5 is a carbocycle or a heterocycle wherein W 5 is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R Y groups;
  • each X 1 or X 2 is independently C-R 10 or ;
  • each R 8 is halogen, NR n R 12 , N(R n )OR n , NR' WR' , N 3 , NO, N0 2 , CHO,
  • each R 9 or R 10 is independently H, halogen, NR 1 'R 12 , N(R n )OR n ,
  • each (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl or aryl(Ci-C 8 )alkyl of each R 1 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 11 or R 12 is, independently, optionally substituted with one or more halo, hydroxy, CN, N 3 , N(R a ) 2 or OR"; and wherein one or more of the nonterminal carbon atoms of each said (Ci-Cg)alkyl may be optionally replaced with -0-, -S- or -NR a -.
  • R 1 is (C]-C 8 )alkyl, (C2 ⁇ Cg) alkenyl or (C2-C8)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 1 is methyl, C3 ⁇ 4F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 1 is (Ci- g)alkyl and R 6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 1 is (Ci-C8)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 1 is (Ci-C 8 )alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 3 is H, OR a , N(R a ) 2 , N 3 , CN, SR a , halogen, (Ci-C8)alkyl, (C2-C 8 )alkenyl or (C2-Cg)alkynyl.
  • R 3 is H.
  • R 3 is H and R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8) alkenyl or (C 2 -C8)alkynyl.
  • R 3 is H and R 1 is (Ci ⁇ C 8 )alkyl.
  • R 3 is H and R 1 methyl, C3 ⁇ 4F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 3 is H and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 3 is H, R 1 is (Ci ⁇ -C 8 )alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 3 is H, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 3 is H, R 1 is
  • R 3 is H, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 3 is H, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 4 is H, OR a , N(R a ) 2 , N 3 , CN, SR a , halogen, (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkenyl or (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl.
  • R 4 is H or OR a .
  • R 4 is OR a .
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) alkenyl or (C2-C 8 )alkynyl.
  • R 4 is OR" and R 1 is (Ci-C 3 ⁇ 4 )alkyl, (C2-C 8 ) alkenyl or (C2 ⁇ Cg)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (C]-C 8 )alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (Ci-C 8 )alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR", R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (C,-C 8 )alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH, In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR ⁇ R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Cj-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of 1 or 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 5 is H, OR a , N(R a ) 2 , N 3> CN, SR a , halogen,
  • R 4 is H or OR a .
  • R 4 is OR".
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl, (C2-Cg) alkenyl or (C2-Cs)alkynyl.
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl, (C2-Cs) alkenyl or (C 2 -Cg)alkynyl.
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (Ci-C8)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (d-CgJalkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 4 is OR", R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X' or X is N.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R' is methyl and R 6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 5 is N3.
  • R 5 is H.
  • R 4 is H or OR a .
  • R 4 is OR a .
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (C)-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C 8 ) alkenyl or (C2-C 3 )alkynyl.
  • R 4 is OR" and R 1 is (Ci-Ce)alkyl, (C 2 -Cg) alkenyl or (C2-Cg)alkynyl.
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl.
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3
  • R 4 is OR ⁇ R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one ofX 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 6 is H, CN, OR a or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OR a . In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is CH3. hi another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is H or OR". In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C 2 -Cg) alkenyl or (C2-C8)alkynyl.
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2 ⁇ Cg) alkenyl or (C2-C 8 )alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR" and R 1 is (C]-C 8 )alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (C]-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR ⁇ R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (Ci-C 8 )alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R 6 is
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 6 is CN, OR a or CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OR a . In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is H or OR". In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-Cg) alkenyl or (C2 ⁇ Cg)alkynyl.
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) alkenyl or (C 2 -C 3 )alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR" and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR", R 1 is (Ci-Q)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR", R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR", R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4 In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 7 is H.
  • R 7 is In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is H.
  • R 6 is CN.
  • R 6 is OR a .
  • R 6 is OH.
  • R 6 is Q3 ⁇ 4.
  • R 4 is H or OR". In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (C]-C 8 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 3 ) alkenyl or -C 8 )alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR" and R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR", R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (C,-C 8 )alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 4 is OR", R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one ofX 1 or 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • X 1 is N or C-R 10 . In another aspect of this embodiment, X 1 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, X 1 is C-R 10 . In another aspect of this embodiment, X 2 is C-H. In another aspect of this embodiment, X 1 is N and X 2 is C-H. In another aspect of this embodiment, X 1 is C-R 10 and X 2 is CH. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OR a . In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is H or OR".
  • R 4 is OR a .
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) alkenyl or (C 2 -Cg)alkynyl.
  • R 4 is OR" and R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl.
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (Ci-C 8 )alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3
  • R 4 is OR", R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4.
  • R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • each R 8 is independently halogen, NR U R 12 , N(R")OR n , NR n NR n R 12 , OR 11 or SR 11 .
  • R 1 is methyl, C3 ⁇ 4F or ethynyl.
  • R 1 is methyl.
  • R 9 is H, halogen, or NR"R 12 .
  • R 9 is H, halogen, or NR"R 12 and R 1 is methyl, CH 2 F, or ethynyl.
  • R 9 is H, halogen, or NR n R 12 and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 8 is N3 ⁇ 4 and R 9 is H or halogen. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 8 is N3 ⁇ 4 and R 9 is H or halogen and R 1 is methyl, C3 ⁇ 4F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 8 is N3 ⁇ 4 and R 9 is H or halogen and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 8 and R 9 are each N3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 8 and R 9 are each N3 ⁇ 4 and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 8 and R 9 are each N3 ⁇ 4 and R 1 is methyl, CH 2 F or ethynyl.
  • R 8 is OH and R 9 is N3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 8 is OH, R 9 is N3 ⁇ 4 and R 1 is metliyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 8 is OH, R 9 is NH 2 and R 1 is methyl, C3 ⁇ 4F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OR a . In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is C3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is H or OR a . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a .
  • R 4 is OR" and R 1 is (Ci-C 8 )alkyl, (C 2 -Cg) alkenyl or (C2-Cg)alkynyl.
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl.
  • R 4 is OR" and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OR", R 1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR", R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (Ci-C 8 )alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 4 is OR", R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is (C]-C 8 )alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-C 3 )alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • each R 10 is, independently, H, halogen, CN or optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • R 1 is methyl.
  • R 1 is methyl, CH 2 F or ethynyl.
  • R 9 is H, halogen, or NR 1 'R 12 .
  • R 9 is H, halogen, or NR 1 'R 12 and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 9 is H, halogen, or NR 1 *R 12 and R 1 is methyl, CH 2 F, or ethynyl.
  • R s is NH 2 and R 9 is H or halogen.
  • R 8 is N3 ⁇ 4 and R 9 is H or halogen and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 8 is N3 ⁇ 4 and R 9 is H or halogen and R 1 is methyl, CH 2 F, or ethynyl.
  • R 8 and R 9 are each NH 2 .
  • R 8 and R 9 are each NH 2 and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 8 and R 9 are each NH 2 and R 1 is methyl, C3 ⁇ 4F or ethynyl.
  • R s is OH and R 9 is NH 2 .
  • R 8 is OH, R 9 is NH 2 and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 8 is OH, R 9 is NH 2 and R 1 is methyl, CH 2 F, or ethynyl.
  • R 6 is H.
  • R 6 is CN.
  • R 6 is OR a .
  • R 6 is OH.
  • R 6 is C3 ⁇ 4.
  • R 4 is H or OR a .
  • R 4 is OR a .
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl, (C 2 -Cg) alkenyl or (C 2 -Cg)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a and R 1 is (Ci-C8)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR" and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R* is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 4 is OR , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-C 3 )alkyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R is CH 3 , CH 2 F, or ethynyl and all remaining variables are defined as for Formula I.
  • R 4 is H, OR a , N(R a ) 2 , N 3 , CN, SR a , halogen, (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-Cg)alkenyl or (C2-Cg)alkynyl.
  • R 4 is H or OR a .
  • R 4 is OR a .
  • R 4 is OR" and R 1 is C3 ⁇ 4, C3 ⁇ 4F, or ethynyl.
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 6 is H, CN, OR a or CH 3 .
  • R 6 is H.
  • R 6 is CN.
  • R 6 is OR a .
  • R 6 is OH.
  • R 6 is C3 ⁇ 4.
  • R 4 is H or OR a .
  • R 4 is OR".
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 6 is CN, OR a or C3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OR a . In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is Q3 ⁇ 4. ⁇ another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is H or OR a . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR" and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR", R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4.
  • R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 7 is H.
  • R 7 is .
  • R 6 is H.
  • R 6 is CN.
  • R 6 is OR a .
  • R 6 is OH.
  • R 6 is C3 ⁇ 4.
  • R 4 is H or OR".
  • R 4 is OR a and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • X 1 is N or C-R 10 . In another aspect of this embodiment, X 1 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, X 1 is C-R 10 . In another aspect of this embodiment, X 2 is C-H. In another aspect of this embodiment, X 1 is N and X 2 is C-H. In another aspect of this embodiment, X 1 is C-R 10 and X 2 is CH. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OR a . In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is C3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is H or OR".
  • R 4 is OR". In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and at least one ofX 1 or X is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X' or X 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or C3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • each R 8 is independently halogen
  • R 1 is methyl, C3 ⁇ 4F or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 1 is methyl.
  • R 9 is H, halogen, or NR n R 12 . In another aspect of this embodiment, R 9 is H, halogen, or NR u R 12 and R' is methyl, C3 ⁇ 4F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 9 is H, halogen, or and R 1 is methyl.
  • R s is N3 ⁇ 4 and R 9 is H or halogen.
  • R 8 is N3 ⁇ 4 and R 9 is H or halogen and R 1 is methyl, C3 ⁇ 4F, or ethynyl.
  • R 8 is N3 ⁇ 4 and R 9 is H or halogen and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 8 and R 9 are each N3 ⁇ 4.
  • R 8 and R 9 are each NH2 and R 1 is methyl, CH 2 F or ethynyl.
  • R 8 and R 9 are each N3 ⁇ 4 and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 8 is OH and R 9 is N3 ⁇ 4. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 8 is OH, R 9 is N3 ⁇ 4 and R 1 is methyl, C3 ⁇ 4F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 8 is OH, R 9 is N3 ⁇ 4 and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OR a . In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R 6 is CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is H or OR a . hi another aspect of this embodiment, R 4 is OR a and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR a , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 4 is OR", R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • each R 10 is, independently, H, halogen, CN or optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • R 1 is methyl.
  • R 9 is H, halogen, or NR"R 12 .
  • R 9 is H, halogen, or NR"R 12 and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 8 is N3 ⁇ 4 and R 9 is H or halogen.
  • R 8 is NH 2 and R 9 is H or halogen and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 8 and R 9 are each N3 ⁇ 4.
  • R 8 and R 9 are each N3 ⁇ 4 and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 8 is OH and R 9 is N3 ⁇ 4.
  • R 8 is OH, R 9 is N3 ⁇ 4 and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 6 is H.
  • R 6 is CN.
  • R 6 is OR A .
  • R 6 is OH.
  • R 6 is CH 3 .
  • R 4 is H or OR A .
  • R 4 is OR" and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OR", R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OR A , R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 4 is OR", R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R 4 is OH and R 1 is methyl.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and at least one of X 1 or X 2 is N.
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is CN, OH, or CH 3 .
  • R 4 is OH, R 1 is methyl and R 6 is H.
  • R' is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C 4 -C 8 )carbocyclylalkyl, (Ci-C 8 )substituted alkyl, (C 2 -Cg)aikenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )substituted alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl, (C 2 -C 8 )substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-C 8 )alkyl;
  • R 2 is halogen
  • R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are each independently H, halogen, OR", N(R A ) 2 , N 3 , CN, N0 2 , S(0) consentR A , (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C 4 -C 8 )carbocyclylalkyl, (C,-C 3 )substituted alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )substituted alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl, (C 2 -C 3 )substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-C 8 )alkyl;
  • R 3 , R 4 or R 5 on adjacent carbon atoms when taken together are - 0(CO)0- or when taken together with the ring carbon atoms to which they are attached form a double bond;
  • each n is independently 0, 1 , or 2;
  • Y is O, S, NR, + N(0)(R), N(OR), + N(0)(OR), or N-NR 2 ;
  • W' and W 2 when taken together, are -Y 3 (C(R y ) 2 ) 3 Y 3 -; or
  • one of W 1 or W 2 together with either R 3 or R 4 is -Y 3 - and the other of W 1 or W is Formula la; or
  • W and W are eac independently, a group of Formula IVa:
  • each Y 1 is, independently, O, S, NR, + N(0)(R), N(OR), + N(0)(OR), or N-NR 2 ;
  • each Y 2 is independently a bond, O, CR 2 , NR, + N(0)(R), N(OR), + N(0)(OR), N-NR 2 , S, S-S, S(O), or S(0) 2 ;
  • each Y 3 is independently O, S, or NR;
  • M2 is 0, 1 or 2;
  • each R x is a group of Formula IVb:
  • each Mia, Ml c, and Mid is independently 0 or 1;
  • M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;
  • C3-C20 carbocyclyl, C2-C20 heterocyclyl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl is optionally substituted with 1-3 R 20 groups;
  • each R is independently H, (C]-Cg) alkyl, (C2-Cg)alkenyl, (C 2 -Cg) alkynyl, C6-C20 aryl, C3-C 2 o carbocyclyl, C 2 -C 2 o heterocyclyl, or arylalkyl;
  • each R s is halogen, NR n R 12 , N(R")OR n , NR"NR"R 12 , N 3 , NO, N0 2 , OR 11 or S(0) friendshipR n ;
  • each R 13 is independently a carbocycle or heterocycle optionally substituted with 1-3 R 20 groups;
  • each (C,-C 8 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl or aryl(C,-C 8 )alkyl of each R 1 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 11 or R 12 is, independently, optionally substituted with one or more halo, hydroxy, CN, N3, N(R b ) 2 or OR b ; and wherein one or more of the nonterminal carbon atoms of each said (Ci-C 3 )alkyl may be optionally replaced with -0-, -S- or -NR b ;
  • Y and ⁇ ' is O.
  • R 8 is halogen, NR U R 12 , N(R n )OR n , NR H NR n R 12 , OR 11 or S(0) friendshipR n .
  • R 9 is H, halogen, S(0) n R" or NR H R 12 .
  • R 4 is OR a .
  • R 1 is CH 3 .
  • R 2 is F.
  • R 7 is
  • R 1 is methyl or ethynyl
  • R 4 is OR a
  • R 7 is H or
  • compound of Formula V are represented the following structures:
  • R 4 is OR a ;
  • each n is independently 0, 1 , or 2;
  • Y is O, S, NR, + N(0)(R), N(OR), ⁇ (OXOR), or N-NR 2 ;
  • W 1 and W 2 when taken together, are -Y 3 (C(R y ) 2 ) 3 Y 3 -; or
  • one of W 1 or W 2 together with R 4 is -Y 3 - and the other of W 1 or W 2 is Formula la;
  • W 1 and W 2 are each, independently, a group of Formula Via:
  • each Y 1 is, independently, O, S, NR, ⁇ (OXR), N(OR), "NfOXOR), or N-NR 2 ;
  • each Y 2 is independently a bond, O, CR 2 , NR, + N(0)(R), N(OR), + N(0)(OR), N-NR 2 , S, S-S, S(O), or S(0) 2 ;
  • each Y 3 is independently O, S, or NR;
  • M2 is 0, 1 or 2;
  • each R x is a group of Formula VIb:
  • each Mia, Mlc, and Mid is independently 0 or 1;
  • M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;
  • C3-C20 carbocyclyl, C 2 -C 2 o heterocyclyl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl is optionally substituted with 1-3 R 20 groups;
  • each R is independently H, (C,-C 8 ) alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) alkynyl,
  • each R" or R 12 is independently H, (C,-C 8 )alkyl, (C 2 -Cg)alkenyl, (C 2 - Cg)alkynyl, (C 4 -C 8 )carbocyclylalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or aryl(Ci-C 8 )alkyl; each R 13 is independently a carbocycle or heterocycle optionally substituted with 1-3 R 20 groups;
  • a is the point of attachment to R 7 ;
  • Ar is phenyl or naphthyl, wherein the phenyl and naphthyl are optionally substituted with 1-3 R 20 groups;
  • each R y is independently (Ci-Cg) alkyl or C5-C6 carbocyclyl, wherein the alkyl and carbocyclyl are optionally substituted with 1-3 R 20 groups;
  • compounds of Formula IV-VI are represented by compounds having a structure:
  • R 11 or R 12 is independently H, (C C 8 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl,
  • each R 3 , R 4 , R 5 is independently selected from the group consisting of R 3 , R 4 , R 5 ,
  • R 6 , R" or R 12 is, independently, (Ci-C 8 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl or aryl(Ci-C 8 )alkyl, wherein said (Cj-C 8 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl or aryl(Ci-C 8 )alkyl are, independently, optionally substituted with one or more halo, hydroxy, CN, N3, N(R a ) 2 or OR a .
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 11 or R 12 could represent moieties such as -CH(NH 2 )CH 3 , - CH(OH)CH 2 CH 3 , -CH(NH 2 )CH(CH 3 )2, -CH 2 CF 3 , -(CH 2 ) 2 CH(N 3 )CH 3 , -(CH 2 ) 6 NH 2 and the like.
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 11 or R 12 is (Ci-Ce)alkyl wherein one or more of the non-terminal carbon atoms of each said (Ci-Cg)alkyl may be optionally replaced with -0-, -S- or -NR a -.
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 11 or R 12 could represent moieties such as -CH 2 OCH 3 , -CH 2 OCH 2 CH 3 , -CH 2 OCH(CH 3 ) 2 , -CH 2 SCH 3 , - (CH 2 ) 6 OCH 3 , -(CH 2 ) 6 N(CH 3 ) 2 and the like.
  • Formulas I-III is a compound selected from the group
  • a compound useful for the synthesis of the compounds of Formula I selected from the group consisting of
  • a compound of the invention or "a compound of Formula I” means a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof.
  • a compound of Formula (number) means a compound of that formula and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, thereof.
  • Alkyl is hydrocarbon containing normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic carbon atoms.
  • an alkyl group can have 1 to 20 carbon atoms (i.e., C1-C20 alkyl), 1 to 8 carbon atoms (i.e., Cj-Cg alkyl), or 1 to 6 carbon atoms (i.e., Ci-Ce alkyl).
  • alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl (Me, - CH 3 ), ethyl (Et, -CH 2 CH 3 ), 1 -propyl (n-Pr, n-propyl, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 ), 2-propyl (i-Pr, i-propyl, -CH(CH 3 ) 2 ), 1 -butyl (n-Bu, n-butyl, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH3), 2-methyl- 1 -propyl (i-Bu, i-butyl, -CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) 2 ), 2-butyl (s-Bu, s-butyl, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 ), 2-methyl-methyl-propyl (i-Bu, i-butyl, -CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) 2 ), 2-butyl (s-Bu, s-butyl, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 ),
  • Alkoxy means a group having the formula -O-alkyl, in which an alkyl group, as defined above, is attached to the parent molecule via an oxygen atom.
  • the alkyl portion of an alkoxy group can have 1 to 20 carbon atoms (i.e., C 1 -C20 alkoxy), ⁇ to 12 carbon atoms(z ' .e., Ci-C J2 alkoxy), or 1 to 6 carbon atoms(i.e., C1-C6 alkoxy).
  • alkoxy groups include, but are not limited to, methoxy (-0-CH 3 or -OMe), ethoxy (-OCH 2 CH 3 or -OEt), t-butoxy (-0-C(CH 3 ) 3 or -OtBu) and the like.
  • Haloalkyl is an alkyl group, as defined above, in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group is replaced with a halogen atom.
  • the alkyl portion of a haloalkyl group can have 1 to 20 carbon atoms (i.e., C1-C20 haloalkyl), 1 to 12 carbon atoms(/.e., C1-C12 haloalkyl), or 1 to 6 carbon atoms(7.e., Ci-C alkyl).
  • suitable haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, -CF 3 , -CHF 2 , -CFH 2 , -CH 2 CF 3 , and the like.
  • Alkenyl is a hydrocarbon containing normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic carbon atoms with at least one site of unsaturation, i.e. a carbon-carbon, sp 2 double bond.
  • an alkenyl group can have 2 to 20 carbon atoms (i.e., C 2 -C 2 o alkenyl), 2 to 8 carbon atoms (i.e., C 2 -Cg alkenyl), or 2 to 6 carbon atoms (i.e., C 2 -C6 alkenyl).
  • Alkynyl is a hydrocarbon containing normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic carbon atoms with at least one site of unsaturation, i.e. a carbon-carbon, sp triple bond.
  • an alkynyl group can have 2 to 20 carbon atoms (i.e., C2-C20 alkynyl), 2 to 8 carbon atoms (i.e., C 2 -C 8 alkyne,), or 2 to 6 carbon atoms (i.e. , C 2 -C 6 alkynyl).
  • suitable alkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, acetylenic (-C ⁇ CH), propargyl (-CH 2 C ⁇ CH), and the like.
  • Alkylene refers to a saturated, branched or straight chain or cyclic hydrocarbon radical having two monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of two hydrogen atoms from the same or two different carbon atoms of a parent alkane.
  • an alkylene group can have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Typical alkylene radicals include, but are not limited to, methylene (-CH 2 -), 1,1-ethyl (-CH(CH 3 )-), 1,2-ethyl (-C3 ⁇ 4CH 2 -), 1,1-propyl (-CH(CH 2 CH 3 )-), 1,2-propyl (-CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-), 1 ,3-propyl (-CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -), 1,4-butyl (-CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -), and the like.
  • alkenylene refers to an unsaturated, branched or straight chain or cyclic hydrocarbon radical having two monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of two hydrogen atoms from the same or two different carbon atoms of a parent alkene.
  • alkenylene group can have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Alkynylene refers to an unsaturated, branched or straight chain or cyclic hydrocarbon radical having two monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of two hydrogen atoms from the same or two different carbon atoms of a parent alkyne.
  • an alkynylene group can have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Typical alkynylene radicals include, but are not limited to, acetylene (-OC-), propargyl (-CH 2 C ⁇ C-), and 4-pentynyl (-CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 C ⁇ C-).
  • Ammonia refers generally to a nitrogen radical which can be considered a derivative of ammonia, having the formula -N(X) 2 , where each "X” is independently H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, etc.
  • the hybridization of the nitrogen is approximately sp 3 .
  • Nonlimiting types of amino include -N3 ⁇ 4, -N(alkyl)2, -NH(alkyl), -N(carbocyclyl) 2 , - NH(carbocyclyl), -N(heterocyclyl) 2 , -NH(heterocyclyl), -N(aryl) 2 , -NH(aryl), - N(alkyl)(aryl), -N(alkyl)(heterocyclyl), -N(carbocyclyl)(heterocyclyl), - N(aryl)(heteroaryl), -N(alkyl)(heteroaryl), etc.
  • alkylamino refers to an amino group substituted with at least one alkyl group.
  • Nonlimiting examples of amino groups include -NH 2 , -NH(C3 ⁇ 4), -N(CH 3 ) 2 , -NH(CH 2 CH 3 ), - N(CH 2 CH 3 ) 2 , - NH(phenyl), -N(phenyl) 2> -NH(benzyl), -N(benzyl) 2 , etc.
  • Substituted alkylamino refers generally to alkylamino groups, as defined above, in which at least one substituted alkyl, as defined herein, is attached to the amino nitrogen atom.
  • Non-limiting examples of substituted alkylamino includes -NH(alkylene-C(0)-OH), -NH(alkylene-C(0)-0-alkyl), -N(alkylene-C(0)-OH) 2 , -N(alkylene-C(0)-0-alkyl) 2 , etc.
  • Aryl means an aromatic hydrocarbon radical derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent aromatic ring system.
  • an aryl group can have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, 6 to 14 carbon atoms, or 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • Typical aryl groups include, but are not limited to, radicals derived from benzene (e.g., phenyl), substituted benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, biphenyl, and the like.
  • Arylalkyl refers to an acyclic alkyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp 3 carbon atom, is replaced with an aryl radical.
  • Typical arylalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, benzyl, 2-phenylethan-l-yl, naphthylmethyl, 2-naphthylethan-l-yl, naphthobenzyl, 2-naphthophenylethan-l-yl and the like.
  • the arylalkyl group can comprise 7 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkyl moiety is 1 to 6 carbon atoms and the aryl moiety is 6 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • Arylalkenyl refers to an acyclic alkenyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp 3 carbon atom, but also an sp 2 carbon atom, is replaced with an aryl radical.
  • the aryl portion of the arylalkenyl can include, for example, any of the aryl groups disclosed herein, and the alkenyl portion of the arylalkenyl can include, for example, any of the alkenyl groups disclosed herein.
  • the arylalkenyl group can comprise 8 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkenyl moiety is 2 to 6 carbon atoms and the aryl moiety is 6 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • Arylalkynyl refers to an acyclic alkynyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp 3 carbon atom, but also an sp carbon atom, is replaced with an aryl radical.
  • the aryl portion of the arylalkynyl can include, for example, any of the aryl groups disclosed herein, and the alkynyl portion of the arylalkynyl can include, for example, any of the alkynyl groups disclosed herein.
  • the arylalkynyl group can comprise 8 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkynyl moiety is 2 to 6 carbon atoms and the aryl moiety is 6 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • substituted in reference to alkyl, alkylene, aryl, arylalkyl, alkoxy, heterocyolyl, heteroaryl, carbocyclyl, etc.
  • substituted alkyl for example, "substituted alkyl”, “substituted alkylene”, “substituted aryl”, “substituted arylalkyl”, “substituted heterocyclyl”, and “substituted carbocyclyl”, unless otherwise indicated, means alkyl, alkylene, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, carbocyclyl respectively, in which one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently replaced with a non-hydrogen substituent.
  • Alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene groups may also be similarly substituted. Unless otherwise indicated, when the term "substituted" is used in conjunction with groups such as arylalkyl, which have two or more moieties capable of substitution, the substituents can be attached to the aryl moiety, the alkyl moiety, or both.
  • prodrug refers to any compound that when administered to a biological system generates the drug substance, i.e., active ingredient, as a result of spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme catalyzed chemical reaction(s), photolysis, and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s).
  • a prodrug is thus a covalently modified analog or latent form of a therapeutically active compound.
  • substituents and other moieties of the compounds of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI should be selected in order to provide a compound which is sufficiently stable to provide a pharmaceutically useful compound which can be formulated into an acceptably stable pharmaceutical composition.
  • the definitions and substituents for various genus and subgenus of the present compounds are described and illustrated herein. It should be understood by one skilled in the art that any combination of the definitions and substituents described above should not result in an inoperable species or compound.
  • "Inoperable species or compounds” means compound structures that violates relevant scientific principles (such as, for example, a carbon atom connecting to more than four covalent bonds) or compounds too unstable to permit isolation and formulation into pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms.
  • Heteroalkyl refers to an alkyl group where one or more carbon atoms have been replaced with a heteroatom, such as, O, N, or S.
  • a heteroatom e.g., O, N, or S
  • the resulting heteroalkyl groups are, respectively, an alkoxy group (e.g., -OCH3, etc.), an amine (e.g., -NHCH 3 , -N(CH 3 )2, etc.), or a thioalkyl group (e.g., -SCH3).
  • the resulting heteroalkyl groups are, respectively, an alkyl ether (e.g., -CH2CH2-O-CH3, etc.), an alkyl amine (e.g., -CH 2 NHCH 3 , -CH 2 N(CH 3 )2, etc.), or a thioalkyl ether (e.g,-CH 2 -S-CH 3 ).
  • a terminal carbon atom of the alkyl group is replaced with a heteroatom (e.g., O, N, or S)
  • the resulting heteroalkyl groups are, respectively, a hydroxyalkyl group (e.g.,
  • heteroalkyl group can have, for example, 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • a C ⁇ -C(, heteroalkyl group means aheteroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • heterocycle includes a “carbocycle” as defined herein, wherein one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, or 4) carbon atoms have been replaced with a heteroatom (e.g. O, N, or S).
  • heteroatom e.g. O, N, or S.
  • heterocyclyl includes saturated rings, partially unsaturated rings, and aromatic rings (i.e., heteroaromatic rings).
  • Substituted heterocyclyls include, for example, heterocyclic rings substituted with any of the substituents disclosed herein including carbonyl groups.
  • a non-limiting example of a carbonyl substituted heterocyclyl is:
  • heterocycles include by way of example and not limitation pyridyl, dihydroypyridyl, tetrahydropyridyl (piperidyl), thiazolyl,
  • tetrahydrothiophenyl sulfur oxidized tetrahydrothiophenyl, pyrimidinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl, benzofuranyl, thianaphthalenyl, indolyl, indolenyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, piperidinyl, 4- piperidonyl, pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidonyl, pyrrolinyl, tetrahydrofurairyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl,
  • carbon bonded heterocycies are bonded at position 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 of a pyridine, position 3, 4, 5, or 6 of a pyridazine, position 2, 4, 5, or 6 of a pyrimidine, position 2, 3, 5, or 6 of a pyrazine, position 2, 3, 4, or 5 of a furan, tetrahydrofuran, thiofuran, thiophene, pyrrole or tetrahydropyrrole, position 2, 4, or 5 of an oxazole, imidazole or thiazole, position 3, 4, or 5 of an isoxazole, pyrazole, or isothiazole, position 2 or 3 of an aziridine, position 2, 3, or 4 of an azetidine, position 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 of a quinoline or position 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 of an isoquinoline.
  • carbon bonded heterocycies include 2- pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 5-pyridyl, 6-pyridyl, 3-pyridazinyl, 4-pyridazinyl, 5- pyridazinyl, 6-pyridazinyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 4-pyrimidinyl, 5-pyrimidinyl, 6- pyrimidinyl, 2-pyrazinyl, 3-pyrazinyl, 5-pyrazinyl, 6-pyrazinyl, 2-thiazolyl, 4- thiazolyl, or 5-thiazolyl.
  • nitrogen bonded heterocycies are bonded at position 1 of an aziridine, azetidine, pyrrole, pyrrolidine, 2-pyrroline, 3- pyrroline, imidazole, imidazolidine, 2 -imidazoline, 3 -imidazoline, pyrazole, pyrazoline, 2-pyrazoline, 3-pyrazoline, pipeiidine, piperazine, indole, indoline, 1H- indazole, position 2 of a isoindole, or isoindoline, position 4 of a morpholine, and position 9 of a carbazole, or ⁇ -carboline. Still more typically, nitrogen bonded heterocycies include 1-aziridyl, 1-azetedyl, 1-pyrrolyl, 1 -imidazolyl, 1-pyrazolyl, and 1 -piped dinyl.
  • Heterocyclylalkyl refers to an acyclic alkyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp 3 carbon atom, is replaced with a heterocyclyl radical (i.e., a heterocyclyl-alkylene- moiety).
  • Typical heterocyclyl alkyl groups include, but are not limited to heterocyclyl-CEt-, 2- (heterocyolyl)ethan-l-yl, and the like, wherein the "heterocyclyl" portion includes any of the heterocyclyl groups described above, including those described in Principles of Modem Heterocyclic Chemistry,
  • the heterocyclyl group can be attached to the alkyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkyl by means of a carbon-carbon bond or a carbon-heteroatom bond, with the proviso that the resulting group is chemically stable.
  • the heterocyclyl alkyl group comprises 3 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkyl portion of the arylalkyl group is 1 to 6 carbon atoms and the heterocyclyl moiety is 2 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • heterocyclylalkyls include by way of example and not limitation 5-membered sulfur, oxygen, and/or nitrogen containing heterocycles such as thiazolylmethyl, 2-thiazolylethan-l-yl, imidazolylmethyl, oxazolylmethyl, thiadiazolylmethyl, etc., 6-membered sulfur, oxygen, and/or nitrogen containing heterocycles such as piperidinylmethyl, piperazinylmethyl, morpholinylmethyl, pyridinylmethyl, pyridizylmethyl, pyrimidylmethyl, pyrazinylmethyl, etc.
  • Heterocyclylalkenyl refers to an acyclic alkenyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp 3 carbon atom, but also a sp 2 carbon atom, is replaced with a heterocyclyl radical (i.e., a heterocyclyl- alkenylene- moiety).
  • the heterocyclyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkenyl group includes any of the heterocyclyl groups described herein, including those described in Principles of Modern Heterocyclic Chemistry, and the alkenyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkenyl group includes any of the alkenyl groups disclosed herein.
  • heterocyclyl group can be attached to the alkenyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkenyl by means of a carbon-carbon bond or a carbon-heteroatom bond, with the proviso that the resulting group is chemically stable.
  • the heterocyclyl alkenyl group comprises 4 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkenyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkenyl group is 2 to 6 carbon atoms and the heterocyclyl moiety is 2 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • Heterocyclylalkynyl refers to an acyclic alkynyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp 3 carbon atom, but also an sp carbon atom, is replaced with a heterocyclyl radical (i.e., a heterocyclyl - alkynylene- moiety).
  • the heterocyclyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkynyl group includes any of the heterocyclyl groups described herein, including those described in Principles of Modern Heterocyclic Chemistry, and the alkynyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkynyl group includes any of the alkynyl groups disclosed herein.
  • heterocyclyl group can be attached to the alkynyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkynyl by means of a carbon-carbon bond or a carbon-heteroatom bond, with the proviso that the resulting group is chemically stable.
  • the heterocyclyl alkynyl group comprises 4 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkynyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkynyl group is 2 to 6 carbon atoms and the heterocyclyl moiety is 2 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • Heteroaryl refers to an aromatic heterocyclyl having at least one heteroatom in the ring.
  • suitable heteroatoms which can be included in the aromatic ring include oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen.
  • Non-limiting examples of heteroaryl rings include all of those aromatic rings listed in the definition of "heterocyclyl", including pyridinyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, purinyl, furanyl, thienyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, carbazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, pyridazyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazyl, etc.
  • Carbocycle or “carbocyclyl” refers to a saturated (i.e., cycloalkyl), partially unsaturated (e.g., cycloakenyl, cycloalkadienyl, etc.) or aromatic ring having 3 to 7 carbon atoms as a monocycle, 7 to 12 carbon atoms as a bicycle, and up to about 20 carbon atoms as a polycycle.
  • Monocyclic carbocycles have 3 to 7 ring atoms, still more typically 5 or 6 ring atoms.
  • Bicyclic carbocycles have 7 to 12 ring atoms, e.g., arranged as a bicyclo [4,5], [5,5], [5,6] or [6,6] system, or 9 or 10 ring atoms arranged as a bicyclo [5,6] or [6,6] system, or spiro-fused rings.
  • Non-limiting examples of monocyclic carbocycles include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, 1-cyclopent-l- enyl, l-cyclopent-2-enyl, l-cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclohexyl, 1-cyclohex-l-enyl, 1- cyclohex-2-enyl, l-cyclohex-3-enyl, and phenyl.
  • Non-limiting examples of bicyclo carbocycles includes naphthyl, tetrahydronapthalene, and decaline.
  • Carbocyclylalkyl refers to an acyclic alkyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom is replaced with a carbocyclyl radical as described herein.
  • Typical, but non-limiting, examples of carbocyclylalkyl groups include cyclopropylmethyl, cyclopropylethyl, cyclobutylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl and cyclohexylmethyl.
  • Arylheteroalkyl refers to a heteroalkyl as defined herein, in which a hydrogen atom (which may be attached either to a carbon atom or a heteroatom) has been replaced with an aryl group as defined herein.
  • the aryl groups may be bonded to a carbon atom of the heteroalkyl group, or to a heteroatom of the heteroalkyl group, provided that the resulting arylheteroalkyl group provides a chemically stable moiety.
  • an arylheteroalkyl group can have the general formulae -alkylene- O-aryl, -alkylene-O-alkylene-aryl, -alkylene-NH-aryl, -alkylene-NH-alkylene-aryl, -alkylene-S-aryl, -alkylene-S-alkylene-aryl, etc.
  • any of the alkylene moieties in the general formulae above can be further substituted with any of the substituents defined or exemplified herein.
  • Heteroarylalkyi refers to an alkyl group, as defined herein, in which a hydrogen atom has been replaced with a heteroaryl group as defined herein.
  • Non- limiting examples of heteroaryl alkyl include -CH 2 -pyridinyl, -CH 2 -pyrrolyl, -CH 2 -oxazolyl, -CH 2 -indolyl, -CH 2 -isoindolyl, -CH 2 -purinyl, -CH 2 -furanyl, -CFb-thienyl, -C3 ⁇ 4-benzofuranyl, -CH 2 -benzothiophenyl, -CH 2 -carbazolyl, -CI3 ⁇ 4-imidazolyl, -CH 2 -thiazolyl, -CH2-isoxazolyl, -CH 2 -pyrazolyl, -CH 2 -isothiazolyl, -CH 2
  • optionally substituted in reference to a particular moiety of the compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI (e.g., an optionally substituted aryl group) refers to a moiety wherein all substituents are hydrogen or wherein one or more of the hydrogens of the moiety may be replaced by substituents such as those listed under the definition of "substituted” or as otherwise indicated.
  • the term "optionally replaced” in reference to a particular moiety of the compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI e.g., the carbon atoms of said (Ci- C8)alkyl may be optionally replaced by -0-, -S-, or -NR a -) means that one or more of the methylene groups of the (Ci-C8)alkyl may be replaced by 0, 1, 2, or more of the groups specified (e.g., -0-, -S-, or -NR a -).
  • non-terminal carbon atom(s) in reference to an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkylene, alkenylene, or alkynylene moiety refers to the carbon atoms in the moiety that intervene between the first carbon atom of the moiety and the last carbon atom in the moiety. Therefore, by way of example and not limitation, in the alkyl moiety -CH 2 (C * )H 2 (C*)H 2 CH3 or alkylene moiety -CH2(C*)H 2 (C * )H 2 CH2- the C* atoms would be considered to be the non-terminal carbon atoms.
  • Certain Y and Y 1 alternatives are nitrogen oxides such as 3 ⁇ 41(0)( ⁇ ) or ⁇ (OXOR). These nitrogen oxides, as shown here attached to a carbon atom, can also
  • O " O " be represented by charge separated groups such as R or 0 R , respectively, and are intended to be equivalent to the aforementioned representations for the purposes of describing this invention.
  • Linker or “link” means a chemical moiety comprising a covalent bond or a chain of atoms.
  • Linkers include repeating units of alkyloxy (e.g. polyethyleneoxy, PEG, polymethyleneoxy) and alkylamino (e.g. polyethyleneamino, JeffamineTM); and diacid ester and amides including succinate, succinamide, diglycolate, malonate, and caproamide.
  • oxygen-linked means that if a bond between two moieties can be formed by using more than one type of atom in a moiety, then the bond formed between the moieties is through the atom specified.
  • a nitrogen-linked amino acid would be bonded through a nitrogen atom of the amino acid rather than through an oxygen or carbon atom of the amino acid.
  • the carbon atoms of the compounds of Formula I- III and Formula IV- VI are intended to have a valence of four.
  • the remaining carbon substituents umed to be hydrogen.
  • Protecting group refers to a moiety of a compound that masks or alters the properties of a functional group or the properties of the compound as a whole.
  • the chemical substructure of a protecting group varies widely.
  • One function of a protecting group is to serve as an intermediate in the synthesis of the parental drug substance.
  • Chemical protecting groups and strategies for protection/deprotection are well known in the art. See: “Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry", Theodora W. Greene (John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1991. Protecting groups are often utilized to mask the reactivity of certain functional groups, to assist in the efficiency of desired chemical reactions, e.g. making and breaking chemical bonds in an ordered and planned fashion.
  • Protection of functional groups of a compound alters other physical properties besides the reactivity of the protected functional group, such as the polarity, lipophilicity (hydrophobicity), and other properties which can be measured by common analytical tools.
  • Chemically protected intermediates may themselves be biologically active or inactive.
  • Protected compounds may also exhibit altered, and in some cases, optimized properties in vitro and in vivo, such as passage through cellular membranes and resistance to enzymatic degradation or sequestration. In this role, protected compounds with intended therapeutic effects may be referred to as prodrugs.
  • Another function of a protecting group is to convert the parental drug into a prodrug, whereby the parental drug is released upon conversion of the prodrug in vivo. Because active prodrugs may be absorbed more effectively than the parental drug, prodrugs may possess greater potency in vivo than the parental drug.
  • Protecting groups are removed either in vitro, in the instance of chemical intermediates, or in vivo, in the case of prodrugs. With chemical intermediates, it is not particularly important that the resulting products after deprotection, e.g. alcohols, be physiologically acceptable, although in general it is more desirable if the products are pharmacologically innocuous.
  • Prodrug moiety means a labile functional group which separates from the active inhibitory compound during metabolism, systemically, inside a cell, by hydrolysis, enzymatic cleavage, or by some other process (Bundgaard, Hans, “Design and Application of Prodrugs” in Textbook of Drug Design and Development (1991), P. Krogsgaard-Larsen and H. Bundgaard, Eds. Harwood Academic Publishers, pp. 113- 191).
  • Enzymes which are capable of an enzymatic activation mechanism with the phosphonate prodrug compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, amidases, esterases, microbial enzymes, phospholipases, cholinesterases, and phosphases.
  • Prodrug moieties can serve to enhance solubility, absorption and lipophilicity to optimize drug delivery, bioavailability and efficacy.
  • a prodrug moiety may include an active metabolite or drug itself.
  • R 30 is C,-C 6 alkyl, d-C 6 substituted alkyl, C 6 -C 2 o aryl or substituted aryl.
  • the acyloxyalkyl ester was used as a prodrug strategy for carboxylic acids and then applied to phosphates and phosphonates by Farquhar et al (1983) J. Pharm. Sci. 72: 324; also US Patent Nos. 4816570, 4968788, 5663159 and 5792756.
  • a prodrug moiety is part of a phosphate group.
  • the acyloxyalkyl ester may be used to deliver phosphoric acids across cell membranes and to enhance oral bioavailability.
  • a close variant of the acyloxyalkyl ester, the alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl ester (carbonate), may also enhance oral bioavailability as a prodrug moiety in the compounds of the combinations of the invention.
  • the phosphate group may be a phosphate prodrug moiety.
  • the prodrug moiety may be sensitive to hydrolysis, such as, but not limited to those comprising a pivaloyloxymethyl carbonate (POC) or POM group.
  • the prodrug moiety may be sensitive to enzymatic potentiated cleavage, such as a lactate ester or a phosphonamidate-ester group.
  • Aryl esters of phosphorus groups are reported to enhance oral bioavailability (DeLambert et al (1994) J. Med. Chem. 37: 498). Phenyl esters containing a carboxylic ester ortho to the phosphate have also been described (Khamnei and Torrence, (1996) J. Med. Chem. 39:4109-4115). Benzyl esters are reported to generate the parent phosphonic acid. In some cases, substituents at the ortho-ox para-position may accelerate the hydrolysis. Benzyl analogs with an acylated phenol or an alkylated phenol may generate the phenolic compound through the action of enzymes, e.g.
  • a compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI and its pharmaceutically acceptable salts may exist as different polymorphs or pseudopolymorphs.
  • crystalline polymorphism means the ability of a crystalline compound to exist in different crystal structures. The crystalline polymorphism may result from differences in crystal packing (packing polymorphism) or differences in packing between different conformers of the same molecule (conformational polymorphism).
  • crystalline pseudopolymorphism means the ability of a hydrate or solvate of a compound to exist in different crystal structures.
  • the pseudopolymorphs of the instant invention may exist due to differences in crystal packing (packing pseudopolymorphism) or due to differences in packing between different conformers of the same molecule (conformational pseudopolymorphism).
  • the instant invention comprises all polymorphs and pseudopolymorphs of the compounds of Formula ⁇ - ⁇ and Formula IV-VI and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • a compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI and its pharmaceutically acceptable salts may also exist as an amorphous solid.
  • an amorphous solid is a solid in which there is no long-range order of the positions of the atoms in the solid. This definition applies as well when the crystal size is two nanometers or less.
  • Additives, including solvents may be used to create the amorphous forms of the instant invention.
  • the instant invention comprises all amorphous forms of the compounds of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • R* comprises a R y substituent.
  • R y can be R.
  • R can be W 3 .
  • W 3 can be W 4 and W 4 can be R or comprise substituents comprising R y .
  • One of ordinary skill in the art of medicinal chemistry understands that the total number of such substituents is reasonably limited by the desired properties of the compound intended. Such properties include, by way of example and not limitation, physical properties such as molecular weight, solubility or log P, application properties such as activity against the intended target, and practical properties such as ease of synthesis.
  • W 3 and R y are recursive substituents in certain embodiments.
  • each recursive substituent can independently occur 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, or 0, times in a given embodiment.
  • each recursive substituent can independently occur 12 or fewer times in a given embodiment.
  • each recursive substituent can independently occur 3 or fewer times in a given embodiment.
  • W 3 will occur 0 to 8 times
  • R y will occur 0 to 6 times in a given embodiment.
  • W 3 will occur 0 to 6 times and R y will occur 0 to 4 times in a given embodiment.
  • Recursive substituents are an intended aspect of the invention.
  • One of ordinary skill in the art of medicinal chemistry understands the versatility of such substituents. To the degree that recursive substituents are present in an embodiment of the invention, the total number will be determined as set forth above.
  • the compounds of the Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI may comprise a
  • R 7 which may be a prodrug moiety w2 wherein each Y or Y 1 is, independently, O, S, NR, ⁇ (OXR), N(O ), + N(0)(OR), or N-NR 2 ; W 1 and W 2 , when taken together, are -Y (C(R y ) 2 ) 3 Y 3 -; or one of W 1 or W 2 together with either R 3 or R 4 is -Y 3 - and the other of W 1 or W 2 is Formula la; or W 1 and W 2 are each, independently, a group of Formula la:
  • each Y 2 is independently a bond, O, CR 2 , NR, + N(0)(R), N(OR), + N(0)(OR),
  • each Y 3 is independently O, S, orNR;
  • M2 is 0, 1 or 2;
  • each R x is inde endently R y , a protecting group, or the formula:
  • Mi a, Ml c, and Mid are independently 0 or 1;
  • M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;
  • each R is H, halogen, (Ci-C 3 ) alkyl, (CrCg) substituted alkyl, (C 2 -C 3 ) alkenyl, (C 2 -Cs) substituted alkenyl, (C 2 -Cg) alkynyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) substituted alkynyl, C6-C 2 o aryl, C 6 -C 2 o substituted aryl, C2-C20 heterocycle, C2-C20 substituted heterocyclyl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl or a protecting group;
  • W 3 is W 4 or W 5 ;
  • W 4 is R, -C(Y ! )R y , -C(Y')W 5 , -S0 2 R y , or -S0 2 W 5 ; and
  • W 5 is a carbocycle or a heterocycle wherein W 5 is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R y groups.
  • W 5 carbocycles and W 5 heterocycles may be independently substituted with 0 to 3 R y groups.
  • W 5 may be a saturated, unsaturated or aromatic ring comprising a mono- or bicyclic carbocycle or heterocycle.
  • W 5 may have 3 to 10 ring atoms, e.g., 3 to 7 ring atoms.
  • the W 5 rings are saturated when containing 3 ring atoms, saturated or mono-unsaturated when containing 4 ring atoms, saturated, or mono- or di- unsaturated when containing 5 ring atoms, and saturated, mono- or di-unsaturated, or aromatic when containing 6 ring atoms.
  • a W 3 heterocycle may be a monocycle having 3 to 7 ring members (2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, and S) or a bicycle having 7 to 10 ring members (4 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, and S).
  • W 5 heterocyclic monocycles may have 3 to 6 ring atoms (2 to 5 carbon atoms and 1 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S); or 5 or 6 ring atoms (3 to 5 carbon atoms and 1 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N and S).
  • W 5 heterocyclic bicycles have 7 to 10 ring atoms (6 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S) arranged as a bicyclo [4,5], [5,5], [5,6], or [6,6] system; or 9 to 10 ring atoms (8 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 2 hetero atoms selected from N and S) arranged as a bicyclo [5,6] or [6,6] system.
  • the W 5 heterocycle may be bonded to Y 2 through a carbon, nitrogen, sulfur or other atom by a stable covalent bond.
  • W 5 heterocycles include for example, pyridyl, dihydropyridyl isomers, piperidine, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, s-triazinyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, furanyl, thiofuranyl, thienyl, and pyrrolyl.
  • W 5 also includes, but is not limited to, examples such as:
  • W 5 carbocycles and heterocycles may be independently substituted with 0 to 3 groups, as defined above.
  • substituted W 5 carbocycles include:
  • Embodiments of R 7 or R 7 together with R 4 include the structures
  • a is the point of attachment to R 7 ;
  • Ar is phenyl or naphthyl, wherein the phenyl and naphthyl are optionally substituted with 1-3 R 20 groups;
  • each R y is independently (Ci-Cs) alkyl or C5-C6 carbocyclyl, wherein the alkyl and carbocyclyl are optionally substituted with 1-3 R 20 groups;
  • each R is independently H, (Ci-C 6 ) alkyl, or arylalkyl;
  • Embodiments of 0 f Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI compounds include substructures such as:
  • each Y is, independently, O or N(R).
  • Ml 2c is 1, 2 or 3 and each Y 2 is independently a bond, O, C 2, or S.
  • one Y 2b -R x is NH(R) and the other Y b -R x is 0- R x wherein R is:
  • each Y 2b is 0 and each R" is
  • each Y b is O and each R x is independently:
  • Ml 2c is 1 and Y 2 is a bond, O, or CRi.
  • Formulas I-III and Formulas IV- VI compounds include substructures such as:
  • each Y is, independently, O or N(R).
  • each Y 3 is O.
  • the substructure is:
  • R y is W 5 as defined herein.
  • each Y 2c is, independently, O, N(R y ) or S.
  • Another embodiment of w of Formula I- III and Formula IV- VI compounds includes the substructures wherein one of W or W together with either R 3 or R 4 is -Y 3 - and the other of W 1 or W 2 is Formula la.
  • Such an embodiment is represented by a compound of Formula lb selected from :
  • each Y and Y 3 is O.
  • W 1 or W 2 is Y 2b -R x ; each Y, Y 3 and Y 2b isOand x is:
  • Ml 2c is 1, 2 or 3 and each Y 2 is independently a bond, O, CR2, or S.
  • W 1 or W 2 is Y 2b -R x ; each Y, Y 3 andY 2b isOandR x is:
  • W 1 or W 2 is Y 2b -R x 3 and Y 2b is O and R x is:
  • Ml 2c is 1 and Y 2 is a bond, O, or CR2.
  • Another embodiment of of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI compounds includes a substructure:
  • W is a carbocycle such as phenyl or substituted phenyl.
  • the substructure is:
  • R x is:
  • M12c is 1 , 2 or 3 and each Y 2 is independently a bond, O, CR 2 , or S.
  • the chiral carbon of the amino acid and lactate moieties maybe either the R S configuration or the racemic mixture.
  • each Y 2 is, independently, -O- or -NH-.
  • y is (C,-C 8 ) alkyl, (Ci-Cg) substituted alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8) alkynyl or (C2-C8) substituted alkynyl.
  • R y is (Ci-C 8 ) alkyl, (Cj-Cs) substituted alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) substituted alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) alkynyl or (C 2 -C 8 ) substituted alkynyl; and R is CH3.
  • R y is (Ci-Cs) alkyl, (Ci-C 8 ) substituted alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) substituted alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 ) alkynyl or (C 2 -C 8 ) substituted alkynyl;
  • R is CH 3 ; and each Y 2 is -NH-.
  • W 1 and W 2 are, independently, nitrogen-linked, naturally occurring amino acids or naturally occurring amino acid esters.
  • W 1 and W 2 are, independently, naturally-occurring 2-hydroxy carboxylic acids or naturally- occurring 2-hydroxy carboxylic acid esters wherein the acid or ester is linked to P through the 2-hydroxy group.
  • each R is, independently, (Ci-C 8 ) alkyl.
  • each R* is, independently, C 6 -C 2 o aryl or C 6 -C 2 o substituted aryl.
  • W 1 and W 2 are independently selected from one of the formulas in Tables 20.1-20.37 and Table 30.1 below.
  • the variables used in Tables 20.1-20.37 e.g., W 23 , R 21 , etc.
  • Tables 20.1-20.37 pertain only to Tables 20.1-20.37, unless otherwise indicated.
  • each R 21 is independently H or (Ci-Cs)alkyl
  • each R 22 is independently H, R 2 ', R 23 or R 24 wherein each R 24 is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R 23 ;
  • each R 23 is independently R 23 , R 23b , R 23c or R 23d , provided that when R 23 is bound to a heteroatom, then R 23 is R 23c or R 23d ;
  • each R 23a is independently F, CI, Br, I, -CN, N 3 or -N0 2 ;
  • each R 23b is independently Y 1 ;
  • each R 2x is independently H, (C r C 8 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 8 )alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl; or two R 2x taken together with a nitrogen to which they are both attached form a 3 to 7 membered heterocyclic ring wherein any one carbon atom of said heterocyclic ring can optionally be replaced with -0-, -S- or-NR 21 -; and wherein one or more of the non-terminal carbon atoms of each said (Ci-Cg)alkyl may be optionally replaced with -0-, -S- or -NR 21 -;
  • each R 25a is independently (Ci-Cg)alkylene, (C2-Cs)alkenylene, or ((3 ⁇ 4-
  • each W 23 is independently W 24 or W 25 ;
  • each W 25 is independently carbocycle or heterocycle wherein W 25 is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R 22 groups;
  • each Y 21 is independently O or S.
  • R x examples include esters, carbamates, carbonates, thioesters, amides, thioami
  • any reference to the compounds of the invention described herein also includes a reference to a physiologically acceptable salt thereof.
  • physiologically acceptable salts of the compounds of the invention include salts derived from an appropriate base, such as an alkali metal or an alkaline earth (for example, Na+, Li+, K+> Ca+ 2 and Mg+ 2 ), ammonium and R4 (wherein R is defined herein).
  • Physiologically acceptable salts of a nitrogen atom or an amino group include (a) acid addition salts formed with inorganic acids, for example, hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, sulfamic acids, phosphoric acid, nitric acid and the like; (b) salts formed with organic acids such as, for example, acetic acid, oxalic acid, tartaric acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, citric acid, malic acid, ascorbic acid, benzoic acid, isethionic acid, lactobionic acid, tannic acid, palmitic acid, alginic acid, polyglutamic acid, naphthalenesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, naphthalenedisulfonic acid, polygalacturonic acid, malonic acid, sulfosalicylic acid
  • Physiologically acceptable salts of a compound of a hydroxy group include the anion of said compound in combination with a suitable cation such as Na + and NRV* " .
  • salts of active ingredients of the compounds of the invention will be physiologically acceptable, i.e. they will be salts derived from a physiologically acceptable acid or base.
  • salts of acids or bases which are not physiologically acceptable may also find use, for example, in the preparation or purification of a physiologically acceptable compound. All salts, whether or not derived form a physiologically acceptable acid or base, are within the scope of the present invention.
  • compositions herein comprise compounds of the invention in their un-ionized, as well as zwitterionic form, and combinations with stoichiometric amounts of water as in hydrates.
  • the compounds of the invention may have chiral centers, e.g. chiral carbon or phosphorus atoms.
  • the compounds of the invention thus include racemic mixtures of all stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, and atropisomers.
  • the compounds of the invention include enriched or resolved optical isomers at any or all asymmetric, chiral atoms. In other words, the chiral centers apparent from the depictions are provided as the chiral isomers or racemic mixtures.
  • racemic and diastereomeric mixtures are all within the scope of the invention.
  • the racemic mixtures are separated into their individual, substantially optically pure isomers through well-known techniques such as, for example, the separation of diastereomeric salts formed with optically active adjuncts, e.g., acids or bases followed by conversion back to the optically active substances.
  • optically active adjuncts e.g., acids or bases followed by conversion back to the optically active substances.
  • the desired optical isomer is synthesized by means of stereospecific reactions, beginning with the appropriate stereoisomer of the desired starting material.
  • chiral refers to molecules which have the property of non-superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term “achiral” refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner.
  • stereoisomers refers to compounds which have identical chemical constitution, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups in space.
  • Diastereomer refers to a stereoisomer with two or more centers of chirality and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another. Diastereomers have different physical properties, e.g. melting points, boiling points, spectral properties, and reactivities. Mixtures of diastereomers may separate under high resolution analytical procedures such as electrophoresis and chromatography.
  • Enantiomers refer to two stereoisomers of a compound which are non- superimposable mirror images of one another.
  • racemic mixture A 50:50 mixture of enantiomers is referred to as a racemic mixture or a racemate, which may occur where there has been no stereoselection or stereospecificity in a chemical reaction or process.
  • racemic mixture and “racemate” refer to an equimolar mixture of two enantiomeric species, devoid of optical activity.
  • the compounds of the invention can also exist as tautomeric isomers in certain cases. Although only one delocalized resonance structure may be depicted, all such forms are contemplated within the scope of the invention.
  • ene-amine tautomers can exist for purine, pyrimidine, imidazole, guanidine, amidine, and tetrazole systems and all their possible tautomeric forms are within the scope of the invention.
  • pyrrolo[l,2-fJ[l,2,4]triazine, imidazo[l,5-fJ[l,2,4]triazine, imidazo[l,2-f][l,2,4]triazine, and [l,2,4]triazolo[4,3- fj[l,2,4]triazine nucleosides can exist in tautomeric forms.
  • structures (a) and (b) can have equivalent tautomeric forms as shown below:
  • Another aspect of the invention relates to methods of inhibiting the activity of HCV polymerase comprising the step of treating a sample suspected of containing HCV with a composition of the invention.
  • compositions of the invention may act as inhibitors of HCV polymerase , as intermediates for such inhibitors or have other utilities as described below.
  • the inhibitors will bind to locations on the surface or in a cavity of HCV polymerase having a geometry unique to HCV polymerase .
  • Compositions binding HCV polymerase may bind with varying degrees of reversibility. Those compounds binding substantially irreversibly are ideal candidates for use in this method of the invention. Once labeled, the substantially irreversibly binding compositions are useful as probes for the detection of HCV polymerase .
  • the invention relates to methods of detecting HCV polymerase in a sample suspected of containing HCV polymerase comprising the steps of: treating a sample suspected of containing HCV polymerase with a composition comprising a compound of the invention bound to a label; and observing the effect of the sample on the activity of the label.
  • Suitable labels are well known in the diagnostics field and include stable free radicals, fluorophores, radioisotopes, enzymes, chemiluminescent groups and chromogens.
  • the compounds herein are labeled in conventional fashion using functional groups such as hydroxyl, carboxyl, sulfhydryl or amino.
  • samples suspected of containing HCV polymerase include natural or man-made materials such as living organisms; tissue or cell cultures; biological samples such as biological material samples (blood, serum, urine, cerebrospinal fluid, tears, sputum, saliva, tissue samples, and the like);
  • sample will be suspected of containing an organism which produces HCV polymerase , frequently a pathogenic organism such as HCV.
  • Samples can be contained in any medium including water and organic solvenfAwater mixtures. Samples include living organisms such as humans, and man made materials such as cell cultures.
  • the treating step of the invention comprises adding the composition of the invention to the sample or it comprises adding a precursor of the composition to the sample.
  • the addition step comprises any method of administration as described above.
  • the activity of HCV polymerase after application of the composition can be observed by any method including direct and indirect methods of detecting HCV polymerase activity. Quantitative, qualitative, and semiquantitative methods of determining HCV polymerase activity are all contemplated. Typically one of the screening methods described above are applied, however, any other method such as observation of the physiological properties of a living organism are also applicable.
  • Organisms that contain HCV polymerase include the HCV virus.
  • the compounds of this invention are useful in the treatment or prophylaxis of HCV infections in animals or in man.
  • compositions of the invention are screened for inhibitory activity against HCV polymerase by any of the conventional techniques for evaluating enzyme activity.
  • typically compositions are first screened for inhibition of HCV polymerase in vitro and compositions showing inhibitory activity are then screened for activity in vivo.
  • inhibitor constants of less then about 5 X 10 ⁇ 6 M, typically less than about 1 X 10" 7 M and preferably less than about 5 X 10 " ⁇ M are preferred for in vivo use.
  • the compounds of this invention are formulated with conventional carriers and excipients, which will be selected in accord with ordinary practice.
  • Tablets will contain excipients, glidants, fillers, binders and the like.
  • Aqueous formulations are prepared in sterile form, and when intended for delivery by other than oral administration generally will be isotonic. All formulations will optionally contain excipients such as those set forth in the "Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients" (1986). Excipients include ascorbic acid and other antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA, carbohydrates such as dextran, hydroxyalkylcellulose,
  • hydroxyalkylmethylcellulose hydroxyalkylmethylcellulose, stearic acid and the like.
  • the pH of the formulations ranges from about 3 to about 11 , but is ordinarily about 7 to 10.
  • the formulations, both for veterinary and for human use, of the invention comprise at least one active ingredient, as above defined, together with one or more acceptable carriers therefore and optionally other therapeutic ingredients.
  • the carrier(s) must be "acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and physiologically innocuous to the recipient thereof.
  • the formulations include those suitable for the foregoing administration routes.
  • the formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Techniques and formulations generally are found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (Mack Publishing Co., Easton, PA). Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active ingredient with the carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients.
  • Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active ingredient with the carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients.
  • the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the active ingredient with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.
  • Formulations of the present invention suitable for oral administration may be presented as discrete units such as capsules, cachets or tablets each containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient; as a powder or granules; as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; or as an oil-in-water liquid emulsion or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion.
  • the active ingredient may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.
  • a tablet is made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients.
  • Compressed tablets may be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder, lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, surface active or dispersing agent.
  • Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered active ingredient moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • the tablets may optionally be coated or scored and optionally are formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therefrom.
  • the formulations are preferably applied as a topical ointment or cream containing the active ingredient(s) in an amount of, for example, 0.075 to 20% w/w (including active ingredient(s) in a range between 0.1% and 20% in increments of 0.1 % w/w such as 0.6% w/w, 0.7% w/w, etc.), preferably 0.2 to 15% w/w and most preferably 0.5 to 10% w/w.
  • the active ingredients may be employed with either a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base.
  • the active ingredients maybe formulated in a cream with an oil-in-water cream base.
  • the aqueous phase of the cream base may include, for example, at least 30% w/w of a polyhydric alcohol, i.e. an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane 1,3-diol, mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol (including PEG 400) and mixtures thereof.
  • the topical formulations may desirably include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the active ingredient through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of such dermal penetration enhancers include dimethyl sulphoxide and related analogs.
  • the oily phase of the emulsions of this invention may be constituted from known ingredients in a known manner. While the phase may comprise merely an emulsifier (otherwise known as an emulgent), it desirably comprises a mixture of at least one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil. Preferably, a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier which acts as a stabilizer. It is also preferred to include both an oil and a fat.
  • the emulsifier(s) with or without stabilizer(s) make up the so-called emulsifying wax
  • the wax together with the oil and fat make up the so-called emulsifying ointment base which forms the oily dispersed phase of the cream formulations.
  • Emulgents and emulsion stabilizers suitable for use in the formulation of the invention include Tween® 60, Span® 80, cetostearyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl mono-stearate and sodium lauryl sulfate.
  • the choice of suitable oils or fats for the formulation is based on achieving the desired cosmetic properties.
  • the cream should preferably be a non-greasy, non- staining and washable product with suitable consistency to avoid leakage from tubes or other containers.
  • Straight or branched chain, mono- or dibasic alkyl esters such as di-isoadipate, isocetyl stearate, propylene glycol diester of coconut fatty acids, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate, isopropyl palmitate, butyl stearate, 2-ethylhexyl palmitate or a blend of branched chain esters known as Crodamol CAP maybe used, the last three being preferred esters.
  • Crodamol CAP may be used alone or in combination depending on the properties required.
  • high melting point lipids such as white soft paraffin and/or liquid paraffin or other mineral oils are used.
  • compositions according to the present invention comprise a combination according to the invention together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients and optionally other therapeutic agents.
  • compositions containing the active ingredient may be in any form suitable for the intended method of administration.
  • tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oil suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsions, hard or soft capsules, syrups or elixirs may be prepared.
  • Compositions intended for oral use may be prepared according to any method known to the art for the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions and such compositions may contain one or more agents including sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and preserving agents, in order to provide a palatable preparation.
  • Tablets containing the active ingredient in admixture with non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable excipient which are suitable for manufacture of tablets are acceptable.
  • excipients may be, for example, inert diluents, such as calcium or sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium or sodium phosphate; granulating and disintegrating agents, such as maize starch, or alginic acid; binding agents, such as starch, gelatin or acacia; and lubricating agents, such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc. Tablets may be uncoated or may be coated by known techniques including microencapsulation to delay disintegration and adsorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period. For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate alone or with a wax may be employed.
  • Formulations for oral use may be also presented as hard gelatin capsules where the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent, for example calcium phosphate or kaolin, or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium, such as peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil.
  • an inert solid diluent for example calcium phosphate or kaolin
  • an oil medium such as peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil.
  • Aqueous suspensions of the invention contain the active materials in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspensions.
  • excipients include a suspending agent, such as sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcelluose, sodium alginate,
  • polyvinylpyrrolidone gum tragacanth and gum acacia, and dispersing or wetting agents such as a naturally-occurring phosphatide (e.g., lecithin), a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid (e.g., polyoxyethylene stearate), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol (e.g., heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from a fatty acid and a hexitol anhydride (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate).
  • a naturally-occurring phosphatide e.g., lecithin
  • a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid e.g., polyoxyethylene stearate
  • a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol e.g., hept
  • the aqueous suspension may also contain one or more preservatives such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxy-benzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • Oil suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient in a vegetable oil, such as arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil, or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin.
  • the oral suspensions may contain a thickening agent, such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol.
  • Sweetening agents, such as those set forth above, and flavoring agents may be added to provide a palatable oral preparation.
  • These compositions may be preserved by the addition of an antioxidant such as ascorbic acid.
  • Dispersible powders and granules of the invention suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent, and one or more preservatives.
  • a dispersing or wetting agent e.g., sodium tartrate
  • suspending agent e.g., sodium EDTA
  • preservatives e.g., sodium bicarbonate, sodium bicarbonate, sodium bicarbonate, sodium bicarbonate
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may also be in the form of oil-in-water emulsions.
  • the oily phase may be a vegetable oil, such as olive oil or arachis oil, a mineral oil, such as liquid paraffin, or a mixture of these.
  • Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums, such as gum acacia and gum tragacanth, naturally-occurring phosphatides, such as soybean lecithin, esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides, such as sorbitan monooleate, and condensation products of these partial esters with ethylene oxide, such as polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate.
  • the emulsion may also contain sweetening and flavoring agents.
  • Syrups and elixirs maybe formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also contain a demulcent, a preservative, a flavoring or a coloring agent.
  • sweetening agents such as glycerol, sorbitol or sucrose.
  • Such formulations may also contain a demulcent, a preservative, a flavoring or a coloring agent.
  • compositions of the invention may be in the form of a sterile injectable preparation, such as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension.
  • a sterile injectable preparation such as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension.
  • This suspension may be formulated according to the known art using those suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents which have been mentioned above.
  • the sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, such as a solution in 1 ,3-butane-diol or prepared as a lyophilized powder.
  • acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile fixed oils may conventionally be employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid may likewise be used in the preparation of injectables.
  • a time-release formulation intended for oral administration to humans may contain approximately 1 to 1000 mg of active material compounded with an appropriate and convenient amount of carrier material which may vary from about 5 to about 95% of the total compositions (weigh weight).
  • the pharmaceutical composition can be prepared to provide easily measurable amounts for administration.
  • an aqueous solution intended for intravenous infusion may contain from about 3 to 500 g of the active ingredient per milliliter of solution in order that infusion of a suitable volume at a rate of about 30 mL/hr can occur.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye also include eye drops wherein the active ingredient is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the active ingredient.
  • the active ingredient is preferably present in such formulations in a concentration of 0.5 to 20%, advantageously 0.5 to 10%, and particularly about 1.5% w/w.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration in the mouth include lozenges comprising the active ingredient in a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert basis such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active ingredient in a suitable liquid carrier.
  • Formulations for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with a suitable base comprising for example cocoa butter or a salicylate.
  • Formulations suitable for intrapulmonary or nasal administration have a particle size for example in the range of 0.1 to 500 microns, such as 0.5, 1, 30, 35 etc., which is administered by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage or by inhalation through the mouth so as to reach the alveolar sacs.
  • Suitable formulations include aqueous or oily solutions of the active ingredient.
  • Formulations suitable for aerosol or dry powder administration may be prepared according to conventional methods and may be delivered with other therapeutic agents such as compounds heretofore used in the treatment or prophylaxis of HCV infections as described below.
  • Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing in addition to the active ingredient such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and nonaqueous sterile injection solutions which may contain anti-oxidants, buffers, bacteriostats and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient; and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions which may include suspending agents and thickening agents.
  • the formulations are presented in unit-dose or multi-dose containers, for example sealed ampoules and vials, and may be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water for injection, immediately prior to use.
  • sterile liquid carrier for example water for injection
  • Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions are prepared from sterile powders, granules and tablets of the kind previously described.
  • Preferred unit dosage formulations are those containing a daily dose or unit daily sub-dose, as herein above recited, or an appropriate fraction thereof, of the active ingredient.
  • formulations of this invention may include other agents conventional in the art having regard to the type of formulation in question, for example those suitable for oral administration may include flavoring agents.
  • the invention further provides veterinary compositions comprising at least one active ingredient as above defined together with a veterinary carrier therefore.
  • Veterinary carriers are materials useful for the purpose of administering the composition and may be solid, liquid or gaseous materials which are otherwise inert or acceptable in the veterinary art and are compatible with the active ingredient. These veterinary compositions may be administered orally, parenterally or by any other desired route.
  • controlled release formulations in which the release of the active ingredient are controlled and regulated to allow less frequency dosing or to improve the pharmacokinetic or toxicity profile of a given active ingredient.
  • Effective dose of active ingredient depends at least on the nature of the condition being treated, toxicity, whether the compound is being used
  • prophylactically (lower doses) or against an active viral infection, the method of delivery, and the pharmaceutical formulation will be determined by the clinician using conventional dose escalation studies. It can be expected to be from about 0.0001 to about 100 mg/kg body weight per day; typically, from about 0.01 to about 10 mg kg body weight per day; more typically, from about .01 to about 5 mg/kg body weight per day; most typically, from about .05 to about 0.5 mg/kg body weight per day.
  • the daily candidate dose for an adult human of approximately 70 kg body weight will range from 1 mg to 1000 mg, preferably between 5 mg and 500 mg, and may take the form of single or multiple doses.
  • One or more compounds of the invention are administered by any route appropriate to the condition to be treated. Suitable routes include oral, rectal, nasal, topical (including buccal and sublingual), vaginal and parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous, intradermal, intrathecal and epidural), and the like. It will be appreciated that the preferred route may vary with for example the condition of the recipient.
  • An advantage of the compounds of this invention is that they are orally bioavailable and can be dosed orally.
  • Combinations of the compounds of Formula I-III and Formula IV-VI are typically selected based on the condition to be treated, cross-reactivities of ingredients and pharmaco-properties of the combination. For example, when treating an infection (e.g., HCV), the compositions of the invention are combined with other active therapeutic agents (such as those described herein).
  • an infection e.g., HCV
  • other active therapeutic agents such as those described herein.
  • compositions of the invention are also used in combination with one or more other active ingredients.
  • the other active therapeutic ingredients or agents are interferons, ribavirin or its analogs, HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, antagonists of the renin-angiotensin system, other anti- fibrotic agents, endothelin antagonists, nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, HCV NS5A inhibitors, TLR-7 agonists, cyclophillin inhibitors, HCV IRES inhibitors, pharmacokinetic enhancers or other drugs for treating HCV; or mixtures thereof.
  • one or more compounds of the present invention may be combined with one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of
  • interferons e.g., pegylated rIFN-alpha 2b (PEG-Intron), pegylated rlFN- alpha 2a (Pegasys), rIFN-alpha 2b (Intron A), rIFN-alpha 2a (Roferon-A), interferon alpha (MOR-22, OPC-18, Alfaferone, Alfanative, Multiferon, subalin), interferon alfacon-1 (Infergen), interferon alpha-nl (Wellferon), interferon alpha-n3 (Alferon), interferon-beta (Avonex, DL-8234), interferon-omega (omega DUROS, Biomed 510), albinterferon alpha-2b (Albuferon), IFN alpha XL, BLX-883 (Locteron), DA-3021, glycosylated interferon alpha-2b (AVI-005), PEG-Inferon
  • ribavirin and its analogs e.g., ribavirin (Rebetol, Copegus), and taribavirin (Viramidine),
  • HCV NS3 protease inhibitors e.g. , boceprevir (SCH-503034 , SCH-7), telaprevir (VX-950), VX-813, TMC-435 (TMC435350), ABT-450, BI-201335, BI-
  • alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors e.g., celgosivir (MX-3253), Miglitol, and
  • hepatoprotectants e.g., emericasan (IDN-6556), ME-3738, GS-9450 (LB- 84451), silibilin, and MitoQ,
  • nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase e.g., R1626, 10 R7128 (R4048), IDX184, IDX-102, PSI-7851, BCX-4678, valopicitabine (NM-283), and MK-0608,
  • non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase e.g., filibuvir (PF- 868554), ABT-333, ABT-072, BI-207127, VCH-759, VCH-916, JTK-652, MK-3281, VBY-708, VCH-222, A848837, ANA-598, GL60667, GL59728, A-63890, A-48773,
  • HCV NS5A inhibitors e.g., AZD-2836 (A-831), AZD-7295 (A-689), and BMS-790052,
  • TLR-7 agonists e.g., imiquimod, 852A, GS-9524, ANA-773, ANA-975, 20 AZD-8848 (DSP-3025), PF-04878691, and SM-360320,
  • cyclophillin inhibitors e.g., DEBIO-025, SCY-635, and NIM811,
  • HCV IRES inhibitors e.g., MCI-067,
  • pharmacokinetic enhancers e.g., BAS-100, SPI-452, PF-4194477, TMC- 41629, GS-9350, GS-9585, and roxythromycin,
  • nitazoxanide (Alinea, NTZ), BIVN-401 (virostat), PYN-17 (altirex), KPE02003002, actilon (CPG-10101), GS-9525, KRN-7000, civacir, GI-5005, XTL-6865, BIT225, PTX-1 11, ITX2865, TT-033i, ANA 971, NOV-205, tarvacin, EHC-18, VGX-410C, EMZ-702, AVI 4065, BMS-650032, BMS-791325, Bavitaximab, MDX-1106 (ONO-
  • mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists e.g., statins, HMGCoA synthase inhibitors (e.g., hymeglusin), squalene synthesis inhibitors (e.g., zaragozic acid);
  • angiotensin II receptor antagonists e.g., losartan, irbesartan, olmesartan, candesartan, valsartan, telmisartan, eprosartan
  • angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors e.g., captopril, zofenopril, enalapril, ramipril, quinapril, perindopril, lisinopril, benazepril, fosinopril;
  • endothelin antagonists e.g. bosentan and ambrisentan.
  • compositions comprising a compound of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, in combination with at least one additional therapeutic agent, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • the therapeutic agent used in combination with the compound or composition of the present invention can be any agent having a therapeutic effect when used in combination with the compound of the present invention.
  • the therapeutic agent used in combination with the compound or composition of the present invention can be interferons, ribavirin or its analogs, HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, antagonists of the renin-angiotensin system, other anti-fibrotic agents, endothelin antagonists, nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, HCV NS5A inhibitors, TLR-7 agonists, cyclophillin inhibitors, HCV IRES inhibitors, pharmacokinetic enhancers or other drugs for treating HCV; or mixtures thereof.
  • compositions of one or more compounds of the present invention may be combined with one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of
  • interferons e.g. , pegylated rIFN-alpha 2b (PEG-Intron), pegylated rlFN- alpha 2a (Pegasys), rIFN-alpha 2b (Intron A), rIFN-alpha 2a (Roferon-A), interferon alpha (MOR-22, OPC-18, Alfaferone, Alfanative, Multiferon, subalin), interferon alfacon-1 (Infergen), interferon alpha-nl (Wellferon), interferon alpha-n3 (Alferon), interferon-beta (Avonex, DL-8234), interferon-omega (omega DUROS, Biomed 510), albinterferon alpha-2b (Albuferon), IFN alpha XL, BLX-883 (Locteron), DA-3021, glycosylated interferon alpha-2b (AVI-005), PEG-Intron
  • ribavirin and its analogs e.g., ribavirin (Rebetol, Copegus), and taribavirin (Viramidine),
  • HCV NS3 protease inhibitors e.g., boceprevir (SCH-503034 , SCH-7), telaprevir (VX-950), VX-813, TMC-435 (TMC435350), ABT-450, BI-201335, BI-
  • alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors e.g., oelgosivir (MX-3253), Miglitol, and UT-231B,
  • hepatoprotectants e.g., emericasan (IDN-6556), ME-3738, GS-9450 (LB- 84451), silibilin, and MitoQ,
  • nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase e.g., R1626, R7128 (R4048), IDX184, IDX-102, PSI-7851, BCX-4678, valopicitabine (NM-283), and MK-0608,
  • non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase e.g., filibuvir (PF- 868554), ABT-333, ABT-072, BI-207127, VCH-759, VCH-916, JTK-652, MK-3281, VBY-708, VCH-222, A848837, ANA-598, GL60667, GL59728, A-63890, A-48773, A-48547, BC-2329, VCH-796 (nesbuvir), GSK625433, BILN-1941, XTL-2125, and GS-9190,
  • filibuvir PF- 868554
  • ABT-333 ABT-072
  • BI-207127 VCH-759, VCH-916, JTK-652, MK-3281, VBY-708, VCH-222, A848837
  • ANA-598 GL60667, GL59728, A-63890
  • HCV NS5A inhibitors e.g., AZD-2836 (A-831), AZD-7295 (A-689), and BMS-790052,
  • TLR-7 agonists e.g., imiquimod, 852A, GS-9524, ANA-773, ANA-975, AZD-8848 (DSP-3025), PF-04878691, and SM-360320,
  • cyclophillin inhibitors e.g., DEBIO-025, SCY-635, and NIM811,
  • HCV IRES inhibitors e.g., MCI-067,
  • pharmacokinetic enhancers e.g., BAS-100, SPI-452, PF-4194477, TMC- 41629, GS-9350, GS-9585, and roxythromycin, 13) other drugs for treating HCV, e.g., thymosin alpha 1 (Zadaxin), nitazoxanide (Alinea, NTZ), BIVN-401 (virostat), PYN-17 (altirex), PE02003002, actilon (CPG-10101), GS-9525, KRN-7000, civacir, GI-5005, XTL-6865, BIT225, PTX-11 1, ITX2865, TT-033i, ANA 971, NOV-205, tarvacin, EHC-18, VGX-410C, EMZ-702, AVI 4065, BMS-650032, BMS-791325, Bavituximab, MDX-1106 (ONO- 4538), Oglu
  • mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists e.g., statins, HMGCoA synthase inhibitors (e.g., hymeglusin), squalene synthesis inhibitors (e.g., zaragozic acid);
  • angiotensin II receptor antagonists e.g., losartan, irbesartan, olmesartan, candesartan, valsartan, telmisartan, eprosartan;
  • angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors e.g., captopril, zofenopril, enalapril, ramipril, quinapril, perindopril, lisinopril, benazepril, fosinopril;
  • endothelin antagonists e.g. bosentan and ambrisentan.
  • the present application provides a combination pharmaceutical agent comprising:
  • a) a first pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; and b) a second pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one additional therapeutic agent selected from the group consisting of HIV protease inhibiting compounds, HIV non-nucleoside inhibitors of reverse transcriptase, HIV nucleoside inhibitors of reverse transcriptase, HIV nucleotide inhibitors of reverse transcriptase, HIV integrase inhibitors, gp41 inhibitors, CXCR4 inhibitors, gpl20 inhibitors, CCR5 inhibitors, interferons, ribavirin analogs, NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors, cyclophilin inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV, and other drugs for treating HCV, and combinations thereof.
  • HIV protease inhibiting compounds HIV non-nucleoside inhibitors of
  • Combinations of the compounds of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI and additional active therapeutic agents maybe selected to treat patients infected with HCV and other conditions such as HIV infections.
  • the compounds of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI may be combined with one or more compounds useful in treating HIV, for example HIV protease inhibiting compounds, HIV non- nucleoside inhibitors of reverse transcriptase, HIV nucleoside inhibitors of reverse transcriptase, HIV nucleotide inhibitors of reverse transcriptase, HIV integrase inhibitors, gp41 inhibitors, CXCR4 inhibitors, gpl20 inhibitors, CCR5 inhibitors, interferons, ribavirin analogs, NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha- glucosidase 1 inhibitors, cyclophilin inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV, and other drugs for treating HCV.
  • HIV protease inhibiting compounds HIV non- nucleo
  • one or more compounds of the present invention may be combined with one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of 1) HIV protease inhibitors, e.g., amprenavir, atazanavir, fosamprenavir, indinavir, lopinavir, ritonavir, lopinavir + ritonavir, nelfmavir, saquinavir, tipranavir, brecanavir, darunavir, TMC-126, TMC-114, mozenavir (DMP-450), JE-2147 (AG1776), AG1859, DG35, L-756423, RO0334649, KNI-272, DPC-681, DPC-684, and GW640385X, DG17, PPL-100, 2) a HIV non-nucleoside inhibitor of reverse transcriptase, e.g., capravirine, emivirine, delaviridine, efavirenz, nevirapine,
  • any compound of the invention with one or more other active therapeutic agents in a unitary dosage form for simultaneous or sequential administration to a patient.
  • the combination therapy may be administered as a simultaneous or sequential regimen.
  • the combination When administered sequentially, the combination may be administered in two or more administrations.
  • Co-administration of a compound of the invention with one or more other active therapeutic agents generally refers to simultaneous or sequential administration of a compound of the invention and one or more other active therapeutic agents, such that therapeutically effective amounts of the compound of the invention and one or more other active therapeutic agents are both present in the body of the patient.
  • Co-administration includes administration of unit dosages of the compounds of the invention before or after administration of unit dosages of one or more other active therapeutic agents, for example, administration of the compounds of the invention within seconds, minutes, or hours of the administration of one or more other active therapeutic agents.
  • a unit dose of a compound of the invention can be administered first, followed within seconds or minutes by administration of a unit dose of one or more other active therapeutic agents.
  • a unit dose of one or more other therapeutic agents can be administered first, followed by administration of a unit dose of a compound of the invention within seconds or minutes.
  • a unit dose of a compound of the invention may be desirable to administer a unit dose of a compound of the invention first, followed, after a period of hours (e.g., 1-12 hours), by administration of a unit dose of one or more other active therapeutic agents. In other cases, it may be desirable to administer a unit dose of one or more other active therapeutic agents first, followed, after a period of hours (e.g., 1-12 hours), by administration of a unit dose of a compound of the invention.
  • the combination therapy may provide "synergy” and "synergistic", i.e. the effect achieved when the active ingredients used together is greater than the sum of the effects that results from using the compounds separately.
  • a synergistic effect may be attained when the active ingredients are: (1) co-formulated and administered or delivered simultaneously in a combined formulation; (2) delivered by alternation or in parallel as separate formulations; or (3) by some other regimen.
  • a synergistic effect may be attained when the compounds are administered or delivered sequentially, e.g. in separate tablets, pills or capsules, or by different injections in separate syringes.
  • an effective dosage of each active ingredient is administered sequentially, i.e. serially
  • effective dosages of two or more active ingredients are administered together.
  • a synergistic anti-viral effect denotes an antiviral effect which is greater than the predicted purely additive effects of the individual compounds of the combination.
  • the present application provides for methods of inhibiting HCV polymerase in a cell, comprising: contacting a cell infected with HCV with an effective amount of a compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV-VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, whereby HCV polymerase is inhibited.
  • the present application provides for methods of inhibiting HCV polymerase in a cell, comprising: contacting a cell infected with
  • HCV with an effective amount of a compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV-VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, and at least one additional active therapeutic agent, whereby HCV polymerase is inhibited.
  • the present application provides for methods of inhibiting HCV polymerase in a cell, comprising: contacting a cell infected with
  • HCV with an effective amount of a compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV-VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, and at least one additional active therapeutic agent selected from the group consisting of one or more interferons, ribavirin or its analogs, HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, antagonists of the renin-angiotensin system, other anti-fibrotic agents, endothelin antagonists, nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, HCV NS5A inhibitors, TLR-7 agonists, cyclophillin inhibitors, HCV IRES inhibitors, pharmacokinetic enhancers and other drugs for treating HCV; or mixtures thereof.
  • additional active therapeutic agent
  • the present application provides for methods of treating HCV in a patient, comprising: administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I- III and Formula IV-VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof.
  • the present application provides for methods of treating HCV in a patient, comprising: administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I- III and Formula IV-VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, and at least one additional active therapeutic agent, whereby HCV polymerase is inhibited.
  • the present application provides for methods of treating HCV in a patient, comprising: administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV-VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, and at least one additional active therapeutic agent selected from the group consisting of one or more interferons, ribavirin or its analogs, HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, antagonists of the renin-angiotensin system, other anti-fibrotic agents, endothelin antagonists, nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5FJ polymerase, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, HCV NS5A inhibitors, TLR-7 agonists, cyclophillin inhibitors, HCV IRES
  • the present application provides for the use of a compound of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, for the preparation of a medicament for treating an HCV infection in a patient.
  • the invention includes novel and unobvious compounds produced by a process comprising contacting a compound of this invention with a mammal for a period of time sufficient to yield a metabolic product thereof.
  • Such products typically are identified by preparing a radiolabeled (e.g. or - ⁇ ) compound of the invention, administering it parenterally in a detectable dose (e.g.
  • metabolite structures are determined in conventional fashion, e.g. by MS or NMR analysis. In general, analysis of metabolites is done in the same way as conventional drug metabolism studies well-known to those skilled in the art.
  • the conversion products so long as they are not otherwise found in vivo, are useful in diagnostic assays for therapeutic dosing of the compounds of the invention even if they possess no HCV polymerase inhibitory activity of their own.
  • compositions and methods for determining stability of compounds in surrogate gastrointestinal secretions are known.
  • Compounds are defined herein as stable in the gastrointestinal tract where less than about 50 mole percent of the protected groups are deprotected in surrogate intestinal or gastric juice upon incubation for 1 hour at 37°C. Simply because the compounds are stable to the gastrointestinal tract does not mean that they cannot be hydrolyzed in vivo.
  • the prodrugs of the invention typically will be stable in the digestive system but may be substantially hydrolyzed to the parental drug in the digestive lumen, liver or other metabolic organ, or within cells in general.
  • nucleoside triphosphate To a pear-shaped flask (5-15 mL) is charged with a nucleoside ( ⁇ 20 mg).
  • Trimethyl phosphate (0.5-1.0 mL) is added. The solution is cooled with ice-water bath. POCl 3 (40-45 mg) is added and stirred at 0°C until the reaction is complete (1 to 4 h; the reaction progress is monitored by ion-exchange HPLC; analytical samples are prepared by taking ⁇ 3 of the reaction mixture and diluting it with 1.0 M Et 3 NH 2 C0 3 (30-50 ⁇ )). A solution of pyrophosphate-Bu 3 N (250 mg) and Bu 3 N (90- 105 mg) in acetonitrile or D F (1-1.5 mL) is then added.
  • the mixture is stirred at 0°C for 0.3 to 2.5 h, and then the reaction is quenched with 1.0 M Et 3 NH 2 C0 3 ( ⁇ 5 mL). The resulting mixture is stirred for additional 0.5-1 h while warming up to room temperature.
  • the mixture is concentrated to dryness, re-dissolved in water (4 mL), and purified by ion exchange HPLC. The fractions containing the desired product is concentrated to dryness, dissolved in water ( ⁇ 5 mL), concentrated to dryness, and again dissolved in water ( ⁇ 5 mL). NaHC0 3 (30-50 mg) is added and concentrated to dryness. The residue is dissolved in water and concentrated to dryness again. This process is repeated 2-5 times.
  • Compound TP-2 was prepared by the general method using Compound 3 as starting material.
  • TP-3 Compound TP-3 was prepared by the general method using Compound 5 as starting material.
  • Non-limiting examples of mono-phosphoramidate prodrugs comprising the instant invention may be prepared according to general Scheme 1.
  • the general procedure comprises the reaction of an amino acid ester salt 19b, e.g., HCl salt, with an aryl dichlorophosphate 19a in the presence of about two to ten equivalents of a suitable base to give the phosphoramidate 19c.
  • suitable bases include, but are not limited to, imidazoles, pyridines such as lutidine and DMAP, tertiary amines such as triethylamine and DABCO, and substituted amidines such as DBN and DBU. Tertiary amines are particularly preferred.
  • the product of each step is used directly in the subsequent steps without recrystallization or chromatography.
  • a nucleoside base 19d reacts with the phosphoramidate 19c in the presence of a suitable base.
  • suitable bases include, but are not limited to, imidazoles, pyridines such as lutidine and DMAP, tertiary amines such as triethylamine and DABCO, and substituted amidines such as DBN and DBU.
  • the product B may be isolated by recrystallization and/or chromatography.
  • Phenyl ethoxyalaninyl phosphorochloridate (124 mg, 0.42 mmol; prepared according to McGuigan et al, J. Med. Chem. 1993, 36, 1048-1052) was added to a mixture of Compound 3 (20 mg, 0.065 mmol) and JV-methylimidazole (42 ⁇ , 0.52 mmol) in anhydrous trimethyl phosphate (0.8 mL). The reaction mixture is stirred for 3 h at room temperature, and then methanol was added to quench the reaction. The methanol solvent is removed under reduced pressure.
  • reaction was allowed to proceed for an hour before p-nitrophenol (1.9 g, 13.8 mmoL, 1 equiv.) was added to the reaction mixture followed by addition of more TEA (3.8 mL, 13.8 mmoL, 1 equiv.) over five minutes. The reaction was allowed to warm up and proceed for another two hours. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo and taken up in diethyl ether (200 mL). The insoluble salts were filtered off and the filtrate concentrated in vacuo. Flash column chromatography was carried out using 4/1 Hex / EtOAc to furnish a clear oil as C-la.
  • Compound C-2a was obtained in a procedure similar to that exemplified for Compound C-la but using the methionine ester.
  • Compound C-6 was obtained in a procedure similar to that exemplified for Compound C-1 using Compound 3 and the sulphone analog of C-la.
  • Solvents Acetonitrile with 0.1% formic acid, Water with 0.1% formic acid Gradient: 0 min-O.l min 5% ACN, 0.1 min-1.95 min 5%-100% ACN, 1.95 min-3.5 min 100% ACN, 3.5 min-3.55 min 100%-5% ACN, 3.55 min-4 min 5% ACN.
  • Compound 30d-l was prepared from 30a in a matter similar to that of 30d-2 substituting alanine ethyl ester hydrochloride for alanine isopropyl ester hydrochloride.
  • Triethylamine (13.2 mL, 95 mmol) was then dropwise added over a period of 15 min. (internal reaction temperature; -10°C ⁇ -3 °C). When the reaction was almost complete (by phosphorous NMR -nitrophenol (6.29 g, 45.0 mmol) was added as a solid in one portion. To the resulting slurry was added triethylamine (6.28 mL, 45 mmol) over a period of 15 min. The mixture was then warmed up to room temperature. When the reaction was complete, MTBE (100 mL) was added. The white precipitate was removed by filtration. The filter cake was washed with MTBE (3 x 50 mL). The filtrate and washings were combined and concentrated.
  • Non-limiting examples of 3'-0-acyalted mono-phosphoramidate prodrugs comprising the instant invention may be prepared according to general Scheme 2.
  • To a solution of compound PD-A in acetonitrile (2 mL) is added A ⁇ iV-dimethyformarnide dimethyl acetal ( ⁇ 1.1 eq.) and stirred at room temperature for 1 h. After the protection of 6-amino group is complete, the mixture is then concentrated to dryness.
  • a dehydrating agent such as DCC ( ⁇ 4 eq.), acetonitrile and a carboxylic acid ( ⁇ 2 eq.).
  • the mixture is stirred at room temperature for 24 -48 h.
  • Water (0.2 mL) and trifluoroacetic acid (0.1 mL) are added at 0°C and stirred at room temperature for 64 h.
  • Sodium bicarbonate was added at 0°C.
  • the mixture is stirred at room temperature for 0.5 h and filtered.
  • the filtrate is concentrated and the residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography to afford compound PD-B. If an acyl chloride or an acid anhydride is used, a suitable base, such as triethylamine, is added instead of a dehydrating agent.
  • Solvents Acetonitrile with 0.1% formic acid, Water with 0.1% formic acid Gradient: 0 min-0.1 min 5% ACN, 0.1 min-1.95 min 5%-100% ACN, 1.95 min- min 100% ACN, 3.5 min-3.55 min 100%-5% ACN, 3.55 min-4 min 5% ACN.
  • Non-limiting examples of 3 ' ,5 ' -cyclic mono-phosphoramidate prodrugs comprising the instant invention may be prepared according to general Scheme 3.
  • Scheme 3 illustrates chemical processes that may be useful for preparation of compound PD-C. Accordingly, PD-Al is converted to PD-C in the presence of a base when Ar is substituted with an electron withdrawing group such as p-nitro or p- chloro group ⁇ European Journal of Medicinal Chemistry, 2009, 44, 3769).
  • compound 40 is converted to Compound 41 according to Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Letters, 2007, 17, 2452, which is then coupled with a amino acid ester salt to form PD-C.
  • Compound 8 is dissolved in PO(OMe)3 (0.1 - 0.5 M solution) and cooled to 0°C under argon. To this stirring solution is added POCI3 (1.0 - 5.0 eq.) dropwise, and the reaction mixture is allowed to warm to room temperature for about 2 -16 h. The resulting solution is added dropwise to a rapidly stirring solution of acetonitrile and 0.05 - 0.5 M aqueous KOH. When addition is complete, the solvents are removed under reduced pressure. The resulting residue is dissolved in water and purified by HPLC to give Compound 41-1.
  • Compound 41-1 Compound PD-D-8u
  • a solution of Compound 41-1 in DCM and PO(OMe is prepared and cooled to 0°C.
  • oxalyl chloride 1.0 - 5.0 eq.
  • DMF a catalytic amount of DMF.
  • the mixture is allowed to stir for about 10 min. to about lh.
  • 2-propanol is added to the reaction mixture and allowed to stir and warm to room temperature.
  • the solvents are removed under reduced pressure, and the resulting crude material is purified by preparative HPLC to give Compound PD-D-8u.
  • Compound PD-E-8v is prepared from Compound 41-1 in a matter that of Compound PD-D-8u substituting 2-aminopropane for 2-propanol.
  • Solvents Acetonitrile with 0.1% formic acid, Water with 0.1% formic acid Gradient: 0 min-0.1 min 5% ACN, 0.1 min-1.95 min 5%-100% ACN, 1.95 min-3.5 min 100% ACN, 3.5 min-3.55 min 100%-5% ACN, 3.55 min-4 min 5% ACN.
  • Raney Ni (about 500 mg) was neutralized by washing with 3 ⁇ 40, and added to a solution of Id (about 100 mg) in ethanol (about 10 mL). The mixture was then heated to 80°C until the reaction is complete. The catalyst was removed by filtration and the solution was concentrated in vacuo. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified by HPLC to give 8.
  • Compound 14 is prepared by treating Compound 13 with about one to about five equivalents of DCC in pyridine and heating the reaction to reflux for about one to about 24 hours.
  • Compound 14 is isolated by conventional ion exchange and reverse- phase HPLC.
  • a solution of about 2 mmol of Compound 18 in methylene chloride (about 10 mL) is treated with an aqueous solution of trifluoroacetic acid (90%, about 10 mL).
  • the reaction mixture is stirred at about 25 to about 60 °C for about one to about 24 hours.
  • the reaction mixture is diluted with ethanol, the volatiles are evaporated and the residue is purified by chromatography to give Compound 20.

Abstract

Provided are pyrrolo[1,2-f][1,2,4] triazinyl, imidazo[1,5-f][1,2,4]triazinyl, imidazo[1,2-f][1,2,4]triazinyl, and [1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-f][1,2,4]triazinyl nucleosides, nucleoside phosphates and prodrugs thereof, wherein the 2' position of the nucleoside sugar is substituted with halogen and carbon substituents. The compounds, compositions, and methods provided are useful for the treatment of Flaviviridae virus infections, particularly hepatitis C infections caused by both wild type and mutant strains of HCV.

Description

2' FLUORO SUBSTITUTED CARBA-NUCLEOSIDE ANALOGS FOR ANTIVIRAL TREATMENT
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The invention relates generally to compounds with antiviral activity, more particularly nucleosides active against Flaviviridae infections and most particularly to inhibitors of hepatitis C virus RNA-dependent RNA polymerase.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Viruses comprising the Flaviviridae family comprise at least three distinguishable genera including pestiviruses, flaviviruses, and hepaciviruses (Calisher, et al, J. Gen. Virol, 1993, 70, 37-43). While pestiviruses cause many economically important animal diseases such as bovine viral diarrhea virus (BVDV), classical swine fever virus (CSFV, hog cholera) and border disease of sheep (BDV), their importance in human disease is less well characterized (Moennig, V., et al, Adv. Vir. Res. 1992, 48, 53-98). Flaviviruses are responsible for important human diseases such as dengue fever and yellow fever while hepaciviruses cause hepatitis C virus infections in humans. Other important viral infections caused by the Flaviviridae family include West Nile virus (WNV) Japanese encephalitis virus (JEV), tick-borne encephalitis virus, Junjin virus, Murray Valley encephalitis, St Louis encephalitis, Omsk hemorrhagic fever virus and Zika virus. Combined, infections from the Flaviviridae virus family cause significant mortality, morbidity and economic losses throughout the world. Therefore, there is a need to develop effective treatments for Flaviviridae virus infections. 5 The hepatitis C virus (HCV) is the leading cause of chronic liver disease worldwide (Boyer, N. et al. J Hepatol. 32:98-1 12, 2000) so a significant focus of current antiviral research is directed toward the development of improved methods of treatment of chronic HCV infections in humans (Di Besceglie, A.M. and Bacon, B. R., Scientific American, Oct.: 80-85, (1999); Gordon, C. P., et al., J. Med. Chem.
10 2005, 48, 1-20; Maradpour, D.; et al, Nat. Rev. Micro. 2007, 5(6), 453-463). A number of HCV treatments are reviewed by Bymock et al. in Antiviral Chemistry & Chemotherapy, 11 :2; 79-95 (2000).
RNA-dependent RNA polymerase (RdRp) is one of the best studied targets for the development of novel HCV therapeutic agents. The NS5B polymerase is a target
15 for inhibitors in early human clinical trials (Sommadossi, J., WO 01/90121 A2, US 2004/0006002 Al). These enzymes have been extensively characterized at the biochemical and structural level, with screening assays for identifying selective inhibitors (De Clercq, E. (2001) J. Pharmacol. Exp.Ther. 297:1-10; De Clercq, E. (2001) J. Clin. Virol. 22:73-89). Biochemical targets such as NS5B are important in
20 developing HCV therapies since HCV does not replicate in the laboratory and there are difficulties in developing cell-based assays and preclinical animal systems.
Currently, there are primarily two antiviral compounds, ribavirin, a nucleoside analog, and interferon-alpha (a) (IFN), that are used for the treatment of chronic HCV infections in humans. Ribavirin alone is not effective in reducing viral RNA levels, 5 has significant toxicity, and is known to induce anemia. The combination of IFN and ribavirin has been reported to be effective in the management of chronic hepatitis C (Scott, L. J., et al. Drugs 2002, 62, 507-556) but less than half the patients infected with some genotypes show a persistent benefit when given this treatment. Other patent applications disclosing the use of nucleoside analogs to treat hepatitis C virus 0 include WO 01/32153, WO 01/60315, WO 02/057425, WO 02/057287, WO
02/032920, WO 02/18404, WO 04/046331, WO2008/089105 and WO2008/141079 but additional treatments for HCV infections have not yet become available for patients. Virologic cures of patients with chronic HCV infection are difficult to achieve because of the prodigious amount of daily virus production in chronically infected patients and the high spontaneous mutability of HCV virus (Neumann, et al., Science 1998, 282, 103-7; Fukimoto, et al, Hepatology, 1996, 24, 1351-4; Domingo, et al, Gene, 1985, 40, 1-8; Martell, et al., J. Virol. 1992, 66, 3225-9. Experimental anti- viral nucleoside analogs have been shown to induce viable mutations in the HCV virus both in vivo and in vitro ( igliaccio, et al., J. Biol. Chem. 2003, 926; Carroll, et al., Antimicrobial Agents Chemotherapy 2009, 926; Brown, A. B., Expert Opin. Investig. Drugs 2009, 18, 709-725). Therefore, drugs having improved antiviral properties, particularly enhanced activity against resistant strains of virus; improved oral bioavailability; fewer undesirable side effects and extended effective half-life in vivo (De Francesco, R. et al. (2003) Antiviral Research 58:1-16) are urgently needed.
Certain ribosides of the nucleobases pyrrolo[l,2-fj[l,2,4]triazine, imidazo[l,5- fj[l,2,4]triazine, imidazo[l,2-fJ[l,2,4]triazine, and [l,2,4]triazolo[4,3-fJ[l,2,4]triazine have been disclosed in Carbohydrate Research 2001, 331(1), 77-82; Nucleosides & Nucleotides (1996), 15(1-3), 793-807; Tetrahedron Letters (1994), 35(30), 5339-42; Heterocycles (1992), 34(3), 569-74; J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. 1 1985, 3, 621-30; J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. 1 1 84, 2, 229-38; WO 2000056734; Organic Letters (2001), 3(6), 839-842; J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. 1 1999, 20, 2929-2936; and J. Med. Chem. 1986, 29(11 ), 2231-5. However, these compounds have not been disclosed as useful for the treatment of HCV.
Ribosides of pyrrolo[l,2-fJ[l,2,4]triazinyl, imidazo[l,5-fj[l,2,4]triazinyl, imidazo[l,2-fJ[l,2,4]triazinyl, and [l,2,4]triazolo[4,3-f][l,2,4]triazinyl nucleobases with antiviral, anti-HCV, and anti-RdRp activity have been disclosed by Babu, Y. S., WO2008/089105 and WO2008/141079; Cho, et al, WO2009/132123 and Francom, et al. WO2010/002877. Butler, et al., WO2009/132135, has disclosed anti-viral pyrrolo[l,2-fj[l,2,4]triazinyl, imidazo[l,5-fJ[l,2,4]triazinyl, imidazo[l,2- fj[l,2,4]triazinyl, and [l,2,4]triazolo[4,3-fJ[l,2,4]triazinyl nucleosides wherein the position of the nucleoside sugar is substituted. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
Provided are compounds that inhibit viruses of the Flaviviridae family. The invention also comprises compounds of Formula I or Formula IV-VI that inhibit viral nucleic acid polymerases, particularly HCV NA-dependent RNA polymerase (RdRp), rather than cellular nucleic acid polymerases. The compounds of Formula I or Formula IV-VI have been discovered to be efficacious against both wild type and S282T mutant strains of HCV virus. Therefore, a compound of Formula I or Formula IV-VI are useful for treating Flaviviridae infections in humans and other animals.
In one embod
Figure imgf000005_0001
Formula I
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof;
wherein:
R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl,
Figure imgf000005_0002
alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-Cg)alkyl;
R2 is halogen;
each R3, R4, or R5 is independently H, OR", N(Ra)2, N3, CN, NC¾ S(0)„Ra, halogen, (Ci-C8)alkyl, (C4~C8)carbocyclylalkyl, (Ci-C8)substituted alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl; or any two of R3, R4 or RS on adjacent carbon atoms when taken together are -
0(CO)0- or when taken together with the ring carbon atoms to which they are attached form a double bond;
R6 is H, OR", N(R¾, N3, CN, N02, S(0)NRA, -C(=0)RN, -C(=0)ORU, - C(=0)NRNR12, -C(=0)SR", -S(0)R", -S(0)2RN, -S(0)(0R"), -S(0)2(ORU), -SO2NR1 'R12, halogen, (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, (Ci-Cg)substituted alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl,
(C2-C8)substituted alkynyl, or aryl(C C8)alkyl;
each n is independently 0, 1 , or 2;
each RA is independently H, (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C3)alkynyl, aryl(C,-C8)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, -C(=0)RN, -C(=0)ORN, -C(0)NRNR12, -C(=0)SRN, -S(0)RN, -S(0)2RU, -S(0)(OR"), -S(0)2(ORN), or -S02NRNR12;
R7 is H, -C(=0)R", -C(=0)ORN, -C(=0)NRHR12, -C(=0)SRH, -S(0)R", - S(0)2R", -S(0)(ORH), -S(0)2(ORU), "R12, or
Figure imgf000006_0001
each Y or Y1 is, independently, O, S, NR, +N(0)(R), N(OR), +N(0)(OR), or N-NR2;
W1 and W2, when taken together, are -Y3(C(Ry)2)3Y3S or one of W1 or W2 together with either R3 or R4 is -Y3- and the other of W1 or W2 is Formula la; or W1
Figure imgf000006_0002
Formula la
wherein:
each Y2 is independently a bond, O, CR2, NR, +N(0)(R), N(OR), +N(0)(OR), N-NR2, S, S-S, S(O), or S(0)2;
each Y3 is independently O, S, or NR;
M2 is 0, 1 or 2;
each R is independently Ry or the formula:
Figure imgf000007_0001
each Mia, Ml c, and Mid is independently 0 or 1;
M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;
each Ry is independently H, F, CI, Br, I, OH, R, -C(=Y!)R, -C(=Y')0R, - C(=Y')N(R)2> -N(R)2, -+N(R)3, -SR, -S(0)R, -S(0)2R, -S(0)(OR), -S(0)2(OR), - OC(=Y')R, -OC(=Y')OR, -OC(=Y')(N(R)2), -SC(=Y')R, -SC(=Y')0R, -
Figure imgf000007_0002
-CN, -N3, -N02, -OR, or W3; or when taken together, two Ry on the same carbon atom form a carbocyclic ring of 3 to 7 carbon atoms;
each R is independently H, (Ci-C8) alkyl, (Ci substituted alkyl, (Cj- C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8) substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8) alkynyl, (C2-C8) substituted alkynyl, -C2o aryl, -C2o substituted aryl, C2-C20 heterocyclyl, C2-C2o substituted heterocyclyl, arylalkyl or substituted arylalkyl;
W3 is W4 or W5; W4 is R, -C(Y')Ry, -C(Y')W5, -S02Ry, or -S02W5; and W5 is a carbocycle or a heterocycle wherein W5 is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R groups;
each X1 or X2 is independently C-R10 or N; each R8 is halogen, NR"R'2, N(Rn)ORH, NRuNRnR12, N3> NO, N02, CHO,
CN, -CH(=NRU), -CH=NNHR", -CH=N(ORM), -CH(ORH)2, -C(=0)NRUR12, -C(=S)NRUR12, -C(=0)OR", (Ci-C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, (C4-Cg)carbocyclylalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -C(=0)(C,-C8)alkyl, -S(0)„(Ci-C8)alkyl, aryl(C,-C8)alkyl, OR11 or SR11;
each R9 or R10 is independently H, halogen, NR"R12, N(Rn)ORn,
NRnNRnR12, N3, NO, N02, CHO, CN, -CH(=NRn), -CH=NHNRn, -CH=N(ORn), -CH(OR")2, -C(=0)NR"R12, -C(=S)NR"R12, -C(=0)ORn, R11, OR11 or SR11; each R11 or R12 is independently H, (C,-C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2- Cg)alkynyl, (Gr-Cs)carbocyclylalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -C(=0)(Ci-C8)alkyl, -S(0)n(Ci-C8)alkyl or aryl(C C8)alkyl; or R11 and R12 taken together with a nitrogen to which they are both attached form a 3 to 7 membered heterocyclic ring wherein any one carbon atom of said heterocyclic ring can optionally be replaced with -0-, -S- or -NRa-;
wherein each (Ci-C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl of each R1, R3, R4, R5, R6, R11 or R12 is, independently, optionally substituted with one or more halo, hydroxy, CN, N3, N(Ra)2 or ORa; and wherein one or more of the nonterminal carbon atoms of each said (Ci-C8)alkyl may be optionally replaced with -0-, -S- or -NRa-.
In another embodiment, provided are compounds of Formula I or Formula IV- VI and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof and all racemates, enantiomers, diastereomers, tautomers, polymorphs, pseudopolymorphs and amorphous forms thereof.
In another embodiment, provided are novel compounds of Formula I or Formula IV- VI with activity against infectious Flaviviridae viruses. Without wishing to be bound by theory, the compounds of the invention may inhibit viral RNA- dependent RNA polymerase and thus inhibit the replication of the virus. They are useful for treating human patients infected with a human virus such as hepatitis C. In another embodiment, provided are pharmaceutical compositions comprising an effective amount of a Formula I or a Formula IV- VI compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier.
In another embodiment, the present application provides for combination pharmaceutical agent comprising:
a) a first pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula I or Formula IV- VI; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; and
b) a second pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one additional therapeutic agent selected from the group consisting of interferons, ribavirin or its analogs, HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha- glucosidase 1 inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, antagonists of the renin-angiotensin system, other anti-fibrotic agents, endothelin antagonists, nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, non- nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, HCV NS5A inhibitors, TLR-7 agonists, cyclophillin inhibitors, HCV IRES inhibitors, pharmacokinetic enhancers and other drugs for treating HCV; or mixtures thereof.
In another embodiment, the present application provides for a method of inhibiting HCV polymerase, comprising contacting a cell infected with HCV with an effective amount of a compound of Formula I or Formula IV-VI; or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvate, and/or ester thereof.
In another embodiment, the present application provides for a method of inhibiting HCV polymerase, comprising contacting a cell infected with HCV with an effective amount of a compound of Formula I or Formula IV-VI; or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvate, and/or ester thereof; and at least one additional therapeutic agent.
In another embodiment, the present application provides for a method of treating and/or preventing a disease caused by a viral infection wherein the viral infection is caused by a virus selected from the group consisting of dengue virus, yellow fever virus, West Nile virus, Japanese encephalitis virus, tick-borne encephalitis virus, Junjin virus, Murray Valley encephalitis virus, St Louis encephalitis virus, Omsk hemorrhagic fever virus, bovine viral diarrhea virus, Zika virus and Hepatitis C virus; by administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I or Formula IV- VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
In another embodiment, the present application provides for a method of treating HCV in a patient, comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I or Formula IV- VI; or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof.
In another embodiment, the present application provides for a method of treating HCV in a patient, comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I or Formula IV- VI; or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof; and at least one additional therapeutic agent.
Another aspect of the invention provides a method for the treatment or prevention of the symptoms or effects of an HCV infection in an infected animal which comprises administering to, i.e. treating, said animal with a pharmaceutical combination composition or formulation comprising an effective amount of a Formula I compound or Formula IV- VI, and a second compound having anti-HCV properties.
In another aspect, the invention also provides a method of inhibiting HCV, comprising administering to a mammal infected with HCV an amount of a Formula I or Formula IV- VI compound, effective to inhibit the replication of HCV in infected cells in said mammal.
In another aspect, provided is the use of a compound of Formula I or Formula IV- VI for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of Flaviviridae viral infections. In another aspect, provided is a compound of Formula I or Formula IV- VI for use in treating a Flaviviridae viral infection. In one embodiment, the Flaviviridae viral infection is acute or chronic HCV infection. In one embodiment of each aspect of use and compound, the treatment results in the reduction of one or more of the viral loads or clearance of RNA in the patient.
In another aspect, the invention also provides processes and novel intermediates disclosed herein which are useful for preparing Formula I or Formula IV- VI compounds of the invention.
In other aspects, novel methods for synthesis, analysis, separation, isolation, purification, characterization, and testing of the compounds of this invention are provided.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS
Reference will now be made in detail to certain embodiments of the invention, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying description, structures and formulas. While the invention will be described in conjunction with the enumerated embodiments, it will be understood that they are not intended to limit the invention to those embodiments. On the contrary, the invention is intended to cover all alternatives, modifications, and equivalents, which may be included within the scope of the present invention.
In another aspe I are represented by Formula II:
Figure imgf000011_0001
Formula II
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof;
wherein:
R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, (Ci-C8)-ubstituted alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl;
each R3, R4, or R5 is independently H, ORa, N(Ra)¾ N3, CN, N02, S(0)„Ra, halogen, (Ci-C8)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, (Ci-Cs)substituted alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl;
or any two of R3, R4 or R5 on adjacent carbon atoms when taken together are - 0(CO)0- or when taken together with the ring carbon atoms to which they are attached form a double bond;
R6 is H, ORa, N(Ra)2, N3> CN, N02, S(0)nRa, -C(=0)Rn, -C(=0)ORn, - C(=0)NRuR12, -C(=0)SRn, -S(0)Ru, -S(0)2Rn, -S(0)(ORn), -S(0)2(ORu), -S02NRHR12, halogen, (Ci-C8)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, (d-Cs) substituted alkyl, (C2-C8) alkenyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl,
(C2-C8)substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl;
each n is independently 0, 1 , or 2;
each Ra is independently H, (d-C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, -C(=0)Ru, -C(=0)ORu, -C(=0)NRuR12, -C(=0)SRu, -S(0)R , -S(0)2Rn, -S(0)(ORu), -S(0)2(ORn), or -S02NRuR12;
R7 is H, -C(=0)RU, -C(=0)ORN, -C(=0)NR"R12, -C(=0)SRN, -S(0)RU, - S(0)2RN, -S(0)(ORU), -S(0)2(OR"), -S02NR"R12, or
Figure imgf000012_0001
each Y or Y1 is, independently, O, S, NR, +N(0)(R), N(OR), +N(0)(OR), or N-NR2; W1 and W2, when taken togedier, are -Y3(C(Ry)2)3Y S or one of W1 or W2 together with either R3 or R4 is -Y3- and the other of W1 or W2 is Formula la; or W and W2 are each, independentl Formula la:
Figure imgf000013_0001
Formula la
wherein:
each Y2 is independently a bond, O, CR2, NR, +N(0)(R), N(OR), +N(0)(OR), N-NR2, S, S-S, S(O), or S(0)2;
each Y3 is independently O, S, or NR;
M2 is 0, 1 or 2;
each Rx is independently Ry or the formula:
Figure imgf000013_0002
wherein:
each Mia, Mlc, and Mid is independently 0 or 1 ;
M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;
each R is independently H, F, CI, Br, I, OH, R, -C(=Y')R, -C(=Y')OR, - C(=Y')N(R)2, -N(R)2, -+N(R)3, -SR, -S(0)R, -S(0)2R, -S(0)(OR), -S(0)2(OR), - OC(=Y')R, -OC(=Y')OR, -OC(=Y')(N(R)2), -SC(=Y')R, -SC(=Y')0R, - SC(=Y')(N(R)2), -N(R)C(=Y')R, -N(R)C(=Y')OR, -N(R)C(=Y1)N(R)2, -S02NR2, -CN, -N3, -NO2, -OR, or W3; or when taken together, two RY on the same carbon atom form a carbocyclic ring of 3 to 7 carbon atoms;
each R is independently H, (Ci-C8) alkyl, (Ci-Cg) substituted alkyl, (C2- Cg)alkenyl, (C2-Cg) substituted alkenyl, (C2-Q) alkynyl, (C -Cg) substituted alkynyl, C6-C20 aryl, C6-C2o substituted aryl, C2-C20 heterocyclyl, C2-C20 substituted heterocyclyl, arylalkyl or substituted arylalkyl;
W3 is W4 or W5; W4 is R, -C^VC, -C(Y')WS, -S02RY, or -S02W5; and W5 is a carbocycle or a heterocycle wherein W5 is independently substituted with 0 to 3 RY groups;
each X1 or X2 is independently C-R10 or ;
each R8 is halogen, NRnR12, N(Rn)ORn, NR' WR' , N3, NO, N02, CHO,
CN, -CH(=NR"), -CH=NNHRn, -CH=N(ORH), -CH(ORn)2, -C(=0)NRuR12, -C(=S)NRUR12, -C(=0)ORn, (Ci-Cs)alkyL (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, (C4-Cg)carbocyclylalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -C(=0)(C,-C8)alkyl, -S(0)n(Ci-C3)alkyl, aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl, OR11 or SR11;
each R9 or R10 is independently H, halogen, NR1 'R12, N(Rn)ORn,
^"Ν^¾, 2, 3, ΝΟ, N02, CHO, CN, -CH(=NRn), -CH=NHNRn, -CH=N(ORn), -CH(ORu)2, -C(=0)NRuR12, -C(=S)NRUR12, -C(=0)ORn, Ru, OR11 or SR11; each R11 or R12 is independently H, (d-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2- Cs)alkynyl, (C4-Cg)carbocyclylalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -C(=0)(C1-C8)alkyl, -S(0)n(Ci-C8)alkyl or aryl(CrCg)alkyl; or R11 and R12 taken together with a nitrogen to which they are both attached form a 3 to 7 membered heterocyclic ring wherein any one carbon atom of said heterocyclic ring can optionally be replaced with -0-, -S- or -NRa-;
wherein each (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8) alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl of each R1, R3, R4, R5, R6, R11 or R12 is, independently, optionally substituted with one or more halo, hydroxy, CN, N3, N(Ra)2 or OR"; and wherein one or more of the nonterminal carbon atoms of each said (Ci-Cg)alkyl may be optionally replaced with -0-, -S- or -NRa-. In one embodiment of the invention of Formula II, R1 is (C]-C8)alkyl, (C2~Cg) alkenyl or (C2-C8)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R1 is methyl, C¾F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R1 is (Ci- g)alkyl and R6is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R1 is (Ci-C8)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R1 is (Ci-C8)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3.
In one embodiment of Formula II, R3 is H, ORa, N(Ra)2, N3, CN, SRa, halogen, (Ci-C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl or (C2-Cg)alkynyl. In one aspect of this embodiment, R3 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R3 is H and R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8) alkenyl or (C2-C8)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R3 is H and R1 is (Ci~C8)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R3 is H and R1 methyl, C¾F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R3 is H and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R3 is H, R1 is (Ci~-C8)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R3 is H, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R3 is H, R1 is
(C1-C8)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R3 is H, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R3 is H, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In one embodiment of Formula II, R4 is H, ORa, N(Ra)2, N3, CN, SRa, halogen, (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl or (C2-C8)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8) alkenyl or (C2-C8)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR" and R1 is (Ci-C¾)alkyl, (C2-C8) alkenyl or (C2~Cg)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (C]-C8)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (Ci-C8)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (C,-C8)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH, In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR\ R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Cj-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of 1 or 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In one embodiment of Formula II, R5 is H, ORa, N(Ra)2, N3> CN, SRa, halogen,
(Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl or (C2-Cg)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR". In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl, (C2-Cg) alkenyl or (C2-Cs)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl, (C2-Cs) alkenyl or (C2-Cg)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (Ci-C8)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (d-CgJalkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X' or X is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3 In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R' is methyl and R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R5 is N3.
In another embodiment of Formula II, R5 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (C)-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8) alkenyl or (C2-C3)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR" and R1 is (Ci-Ce)alkyl, (C2-Cg) alkenyl or (C2-Cg)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3 In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR\ R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one ofX1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In another embodiment of Formula II, R6 is H, CN, ORa or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CH3. hi another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or OR". In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-Cg) alkenyl or (C2-C8)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2~Cg) alkenyl or (C2-C8)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR" and R1 is (C]-C8)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (C]-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR\ R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (Ci-C8)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3 In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R6 is
CN, OH, or CH3 In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In another embodiment of Formula II, R6 is CN, ORa or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or OR". In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-Cg) alkenyl or (C2~Cg)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8) alkenyl or (C2-C3)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR" and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is (Ci-Q)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾ In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3.
In one embodiment of Formula II, R7 is H, -C(=0)Rn, -C(0)ORn, -
Figure imgf000019_0001
. In a aspect of this embodiment, R7 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R7 is -C(=0)Rn. In another aspect of this embodiment, R7 is -C(=0)Ru wherein Rn is (Ci-Cg)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R7 is
Figure imgf000019_0002
In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is Q¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or OR". In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (C]-C8)alkyl, (C2-C3) alkenyl or -C8)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR" and R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (C,-C8)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3 In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is methyl and R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one ofX1 or 2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾ In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In one embodiment of Formula II, X1 is N or C-R10. In another aspect of this embodiment, X1 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, X1 is C-R10. In another aspect of this embodiment, X2 is C-H. In another aspect of this embodiment, X1 is N and X2 is C-H. In another aspect of this embodiment, X1 is C-R10 and X2 is CH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or OR". In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8) alkenyl or (C2-Cg)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR" and R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (Ci-C8)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3 In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In another embodiment of Formula II, each R8 is independently halogen, NRUR12, N(R")ORn, NRnNRnR12, OR11 or SR11. In another aspect of this embodiment, R1 is methyl, C¾F or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R9 is H, halogen, or NR"R12. In another aspect of this embodiment, R9 is H, halogen, or NR"R12 and R1 is methyl, CH2F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R9 is H, halogen, or NRnR12 and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is N¾ and R9 is H or halogen. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is N¾ and R9 is H or halogen and R1 is methyl, C¾F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is N¾ and R9 is H or halogen and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 and R9 are each N¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 and R9 are each N¾ and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 and R9 are each N¾ and R1 is methyl, CH2F or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is OH and R9 is N¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is OH, R9 is N¾ and R1 is metliyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is OH, R9 is NH2 and R1 is methyl, C¾F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR" and R1 is (Ci-C8)alkyl, (C2-Cg) alkenyl or (C2-Cg)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR" and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (Ci-C8)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (C]-C8)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-C3)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In another embodiment of Formula II, each R10 is, independently, H, halogen, CN or optionally substituted heteroaryl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R1 is methyl, CH2F or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R9 is H, halogen, or NR1 'R12. In another aspect of this embodiment, R9 is H, halogen, or NR1 'R12 and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R9 is H, halogen, or NR1 *R12 and R1 is methyl, CH2F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, Rs is NH2 and R9 is H or halogen. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is N¾ and R9 is H or halogen and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is N¾ and R9 is H or halogen and R1 is methyl, CH2F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 and R9 are each NH2. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 and R9 are each NH2 and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 and R9 are each NH2 and R1 is methyl, C¾F or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, Rs is OH and R9 is NH2. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is OH, R9 is NH2 and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is OH, R9 is NH2 and R1 is methyl, CH2F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl, (C2-Cg) alkenyl or (C2-Cg)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is (Ci-C8)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR" and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl and R* is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR , R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-C3)alkyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is (Ci-Cs)alkyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In another embodiment, compounds of Formula I or Formula II are represented by Formula III:
Figure imgf000023_0001
Formula III
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof;
wherein:
R is CH3, CH2F, or ethynyl and all remaining variables are defined as for Formula I.
In one embodiment of Formula III, R4 is H, ORa, N(Ra)2, N3, CN, SRa, halogen, (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-Cg)alkenyl or (C2-Cg)alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR" and R1 is C¾, C¾F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In another embodiment of Formula III, R6 is H, CN, ORa or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR". In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In another embodiment of Formula III, R6 is CN, ORa or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is Q¾. Γη another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR" and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3.
In one embodiment of Formula III, R7 is H, -C(=0)Rn, -C(=0)ORn, - C(=0)SRn or
Figure imgf000025_0001
. In a aspect of this embodiment, R7 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R7 is -C(=0)Rn. In another aspect of this embodiment, R7 is -C(=0)Rn wherein R11 is (Ci-Cg)alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R7 is
Figure imgf000025_0002
. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or OR". In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In one embodiment of Formula III, X1 is N or C-R10. In another aspect of this embodiment, X1 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, X1 is C-R10. In another aspect of this embodiment, X2 is C-H. In another aspect of this embodiment, X1 is N and X2 is C-H. In another aspect of this embodiment, X1 is C-R10 and X2 is CH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or OR". In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR". In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and at least one ofX1 or X is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of X' or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or C¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In another embodiment of Formula III, each R8 is independently halogen,
NR11R12, N(R11)0R", NR"NR11R12, 0R11 or SR11. In another aspect of this embodiment, R1 is methyl, C¾F or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R9 is H, halogen, or NRnR12. In another aspect of this embodiment, R9 is H, halogen, or NRuR12 and R' is methyl, C¾F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R9 is H, halogen, or and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, Rs is N¾ and R9 is H or halogen. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is N¾ and R9 is H or halogen and R1 is methyl, C¾F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is N¾ and R9 is H or halogen and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 and R9 are each N¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 and R9 are each NH2 and R1 is methyl, CH2F or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 and R9 are each N¾ and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is OH and R9 is N¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is OH, R9 is N¾ and R1 is methyl, C¾F, or ethynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is OH, R9 is N¾ and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or ORa. hi another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORa, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is methyl and R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In another embodiment of Formula III, each R10 is, independently, H, halogen, CN or optionally substituted heteroaryl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R9 is H, halogen, or NR"R12. In another aspect of this embodiment, R9 is H, halogen, or NR"R12 and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is N¾ and R9 is H or halogen. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is NH2 and R9 is H or halogen and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 and R9 are each N¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 and R9 are each N¾ and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is OH and R9 is N¾. In another aspect of this embodiment, R8 is OH, R9 is N¾ and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CN. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is ORA. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is OH. In another aspect of this embodiment R6 is CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is H or ORA. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR" and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is ORA, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OR", R1 is methyl and R6 is H. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH and R1 is methyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and at least one of X1 or X2 is N. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is CN, OH, or CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, R4 is OH, R1 is methyl and R6 is H.
In another embodiment, provided are compounds of Formula IV:
Figure imgf000028_0001
Formula IV
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof;
wherein:
R' is (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, (Ci-C8)substituted alkyl, (C2-Cg)aikenyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl;
R2 is halogen;
R3, R4, and R5 are each independently H, halogen, OR", N(RA)2, N3, CN, N02, S(0)„RA, (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, (C,-C3)substituted alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, (C2-C3)substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl;
or any two of R3, R4 or R5 on adjacent carbon atoms when taken together are - 0(CO)0- or when taken together with the ring carbon atoms to which they are attached form a double bond;
each n is independently 0, 1 , or 2;
each RA is independently H, (Ci-C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, aryl(C,-C8)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, -C(=0)RN, -C(=0)ORN, -C(=0)NRNR12, -C(=0)SRN, -S(0)R" , -S(0)2RN, -S(0)(ORN), -S(0)2(ORN), or -S02NR"R'2;
R7 is H, -C(=0)R", -C(=0)ORN, -C(=0)NR"R'2, -C(=0)SRU, -S(0)RN, - S(0)2RN, -S(0)(OR"), -S(0)2(OR"), -S02NRHR12, or
Figure imgf000029_0001
Y is O, S, NR, +N(0)(R), N(OR), +N(0)(OR), or N-NR2;
W' and W2, when taken together, are -Y3(C(Ry)2)3Y3-; or
one of W1 or W2 together with either R3 or R4 is -Y3- and the other of W1 or W is Formula la; or
W and W are eac independently, a group of Formula IVa:
Figure imgf000029_0002
Formula IVa
wherein:
each Y1 is, independently, O, S, NR, +N(0)(R), N(OR), +N(0)(OR), or N-NR2;
each Y2 is independently a bond, O, CR2, NR, +N(0)(R), N(OR), +N(0)(OR), N-NR2, S, S-S, S(O), or S(0)2;
each Y3 is independently O, S, or NR;
M2 is 0, 1 or 2;
each Rx is a group of Formula IVb:
Figure imgf000030_0001
Formula IVb wherein:
each Mia, Ml c, and Mid is independently 0 or 1;
M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;
each Ry is independently H, F, CI, Br, I, OH, -C(=Y')R, -C(=Y')R1 3, - C(=Y')OR, -C(=Y')N(R)2, -N(R)2, -+N(R)3, -SR, -S(0)R, -S(0)2R, -S(0)2R13, - S(0)(OR), -S(0)2(OR),
Figure imgf000030_0002
- SC(=YI)OR, -SC(=Y1)(N(R)2), -N(R)C(=Y')R, -N(R)C(=Y')0R, -N(R)C(=Y')N(R)2) -SO2NR2, -CN, -N3, -NO2, -OR, (Ci-Cg) alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-Cg) alkynyl, C6-C20 aryl, C3-C20 carbocyclyl, C2-C20 heterocyclyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl; wherein each (C]-Cg) alkyl, (C2-Cg)alkenyl, (C2-Cg) alkynyl, C6-C20 aryl,
C3-C20 carbocyclyl, C2-C20 heterocyclyl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl is optionally substituted with 1-3 R20 groups;
or when taken together, two Ry on the same carbon atom form a carbocyclic ring of 3 to 7 carbon atoms;
each R is independently H, (C]-Cg) alkyl, (C2-Cg)alkenyl, (C2-Cg) alkynyl, C6-C20 aryl, C3-C2o carbocyclyl, C2-C2o heterocyclyl, or arylalkyl;
each Rs is halogen, NRnR12, N(R")ORn, NR"NR"R12, N3, NO, N02, OR11 or S(0)„Rn;
each R9 is independently H, halogen, NRUR12, N(Rn)OR", NR"NR"R12, N3, NO, N02, CHO, CN, -CH(=NRH), -CH=NHNRn, -CH=N(ORn), -CH(ORn)2, -C(=0)NR"R12, -C(=S)NRnR12, -C(=0)OR", R", OR1 1 or S(0)nRn;
each R1 1 or R12 is independently H, (C1-C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2- Cg)alkynyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -C(=0)(CrC8)alkyl, -S(0)N(CRC8)alkyl or aryl(CrCg)alkyl; or R11 and R12 taken together with a nitrogen to which they are both attached form a 3 to 7 membered heterocyclic ring wherein any one carbon atom of said heterocyclic ring can optionally be replaced with -0-, -S- or-NRb-;
each R13 is independently a carbocycle or heterocycle optionally substituted with 1-3 R20 groups;
each R20 is independently, halogen, CN, N3, N(R)2, OR, -SR, -S(0)R, -S(0)2R, -S(0)(OR), -S(0)2(OR), -C(=Y')R, -C(=Y')0R, or C(=Y')N(R)2;
wherein each (C,-C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl or aryl(C,-C8)alkyl of each R1, R3, R4, R5, R6, R11 or R12 is, independently, optionally substituted with one or more halo, hydroxy, CN, N3, N(Rb)2 or ORb; and wherein one or more of the nonterminal carbon atoms of each said (Ci-C3)alkyl may be optionally replaced with -0-, -S- or -NRb;
each Rb is independently H, (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-Cg)alkynyl, aryl(C)-C8)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, -C(=0)R21, -C(=0)OR21, -C(=0)NR2,R22, -C(=0)SR21, -S(0)R21, -S(0)2R21, -S(0)(OR21), -S(0)2(OR21), or -S02NR21R22; each R21 or R22 is independently H, (C,-C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2- C8)alkynyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, -C(=0)(C,-C8)alkyl, -S(0)n(C,-C8)alkyl or aryl(C,-C8)alkyl;
with the optional proviso that compounds 1, 1c, Id, le, 2, TP-1, A-l, 8, and 21 are excluded.
In another aspect of this embodiment Y and Υ' is O. In another aspect of this embodiment R8 is halogen, NRUR12, N(Rn)ORn, NRHNRnR12, OR11 or S(0)„Rn. In another aspect of this embodiment R9 is H, halogen, S(0)nR" or NRHR12. In another aspect of this embodiment R4 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment R1 is CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment R2 is F. In another aspect of this embodiment R7 is
Figure imgf000032_0001
wherein Y is -0-; W1 is Formula la and W2 together with R4 is -O-.In another embodiment, compounds of Formula IV are represented by Formula V:
Figure imgf000032_0002
wherein R1 is methyl or ethynyl, and R4 is ORa. In another aspect of this embodiment R7 is H or
Figure imgf000032_0003
In another aspect of this embodiment, compound of Formula V are represented the following structures:
Figure imgf000033_0001
In anotlier embodiment, provided are compounds of Formula VI:
Figure imgf000034_0001
Formula VI
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof;
wherein:
R4 is ORa;
each n is independently 0, 1 , or 2;
each Ra is independently H, (C C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl, (C4~C8)carbocyclylalkyl, -C(=0)Rn, -C(=0)ORn, -C(=0)NR1!R12, -C(=0)SRn, -S(0)Ru, -S^R11, -S(0)(OR"), -S(0)2(ORn), or -S02NRnR12;
R7 is H, -C(=0)Rn, -C(=0)ORu, -C(=0)NRnR12, -C(=0)SRn, -S(0)Rn, -
S(0)2Rn, -S(0)(ORn), -S(0)2(ORu), -S02NRnR12, or
Figure imgf000034_0002
Y is O, S, NR, +N(0)(R), N(OR), ^(OXOR), or N-NR2;
W1 and W2, when taken together, are -Y3(C(Ry)2)3Y3-; or
one of W1 or W2 together with R4 is -Y3- and the other of W1 or W2 is Formula la; or
W1 and W2 are each, independently, a group of Formula Via:
Figure imgf000035_0001
Formula Via
wherein:
each Y1 is, independently, O, S, NR, ^(OXR), N(OR), "NfOXOR), or N-NR2;
each Y2 is independently a bond, O, CR2, NR, +N(0)(R), N(OR), +N(0)(OR), N-NR2, S, S-S, S(O), or S(0)2;
each Y3 is independently O, S, or NR;
M2 is 0, 1 or 2;
each Rx is a group of Formula VIb:
Figure imgf000035_0002
Formula VIb wherein:
each Mia, Mlc, and Mid is independently 0 or 1;
M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;
each RY is independently H, F, CI, Br, I, OH, -C(=Y')R, -C(=Y')R13, - C(=Y')OR, -C(=Y')N(R)2, -N(R)2, -+N(R)3, -SR, -S(0)R, -S(0)2R, -S(0)2R13, - S(0)(OR), -S(0)2(OR), -OC(=Y')R, -OC(=Y')OR, -OC(=Y')(N(R)2), -SC(=Y')R, - SC(=Y')OR, -SC(=Y')(N(R)2), -N(R)C(=Y')R, -N(R)C(=Y')OR, -N(R)C(=Y')N(R)2, -S02NR2, -CN, -N3, -N02, -OR, (d-Cg) alkyl, (C2-C3)alkenyl, (C2-C8) alkynyl, C6-C20 aryl, C3-C20 carbocyclyl, C2-C20 heterocyclyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl; wherein each (Ci-C8) alkyl, (C2-Cg)alkenyl, (C2-C8) alkynyl, C6-C2o aryl,
C3-C20 carbocyclyl, C2-C2o heterocyclyl, arylalkyl, or heteroarylalkyl is optionally substituted with 1-3 R20 groups;
each R is independently H, (C,-C8) alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8) alkynyl,
C6-C20 aryl, C3-C2o carbocyclyl, C2-C20 heterocyclyl, or arylalkyl;
each R" or R12 is independently H, (C,-C8)alkyl, (C2-Cg)alkenyl, (C2- Cg)alkynyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl,
Figure imgf000036_0001
or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl; each R13 is independently a carbocycle or heterocycle optionally substituted with 1-3 R20 groups;
each R20 is independently, halogen, CN, N3, N(R)2, OR, -SR, -S(0)R, -S(0)2R, -S(0)(OR), -S(0)2(OR), -C(=Y')R, -C(=Y')OR, or C(=Y')N(R)2;
wherein each (Ci-C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl of each R4, R11 or R12 is, independently, optionally substituted with one or more halo, hydroxy, CN, N3, N(Rb)2 or ORb; and wherein one or more of the non-terminal carbon atoms of each said (Ci-Cg)alkyl may be optionally replaced with -0-, -S- or -NRb; each Rb is independently H, (CrC8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, -C(=0)Rzl, -C(=0)OR21, -C(0)NR21R22, -C(=0)SR21, -S(0)R21, -S(0)2R21, -S(0)(OR21), -S(0)2(OR21), or -S02NR21R22; each R21 or R22 is independently H, (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2- Cg)alkynyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, -C(=0)(Ci-C8)alkyl, -S(0)„(C C8)alkyl or aryl(C,-C8)alkyl; and
with the optional proviso that compounds 1, lc, Id, le, 2, TP-1, A-l, 8, and 21 are excluded.
In another aspect of this embodiment R" is H, (Ci-Cg)alkyl, or -C(=0)(Ci- C6)alkyl; R7 or R7 together with R4 is
Figure imgf000037_0001
wherein
a is the point of attachment to R7;
b is the point of attachment to R4;
Ar is phenyl or naphthyl, wherein the phenyl and naphthyl are optionally substituted with 1-3 R20 groups;
each Ry is independently (Ci-Cg) alkyl or C5-C6 carbocyclyl, wherein the alkyl and carbocyclyl are optionally substituted with 1-3 R20 groups;
each R is independently H, (Ci-Q) alkyl, or arylalkyl; and each R20 is independently halogen, CN, N(R)2, OR, -SR, -S(0)R, -S(0)2R, S(0)(OR), -S(0)2(OR), -C(=0)R, -C(=0)OR, or C(=0)N(R)2.
In another embodiment, compounds of Formula IV-VI are represented by compounds having a structure:
Figure imgf000037_0002
Figure imgf000038_0001
Figure imgf000039_0001
Figure imgf000040_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof.
In one embodiment of Formulas I-III and Formulas IV- VI, R11 or R12 is independently H, (C C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl,
(Gt-Cgjcarbocyclylalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl,
Figure imgf000040_0002
-S(0)„(Ci-C8)alkyl or aryl(C,-C8)alkyl. In anotlier embodiment, R11 and R12 taken together with a nitrogen to which they are both attached, form a 3 to 7 membered heterocyclic ring wherein any one carbon atom of said heterocyclic ring can optionally be replaced with -0-, -S- or -NRA-. Therefore, by way of example and not
Figure imgf000040_0003
and the like.
In another embodiment of Formulas I-III and Formulas IV-VI, each R3, R4, R5,
R6, R" or R12 is, independently, (Ci-C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl, wherein said (Cj-C8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl are, independently, optionally substituted with one or more halo, hydroxy, CN, N3, N(Ra)2 or ORa. Therefore, by way of example and not limitation, R3, R4, R5, R6, R11 or R12 could represent moieties such as -CH(NH2)CH3, - CH(OH)CH2CH3, -CH(NH2)CH(CH3)2, -CH2CF3, -(CH2)2CH(N3)CH3, -(CH2)6NH2 and the like.
In another embodiment of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI, R3, R4, R5, R6, R11 or R12 is (Ci-Ce)alkyl wherein one or more of the non-terminal carbon atoms of each said (Ci-Cg)alkyl may be optionally replaced with -0-, -S- or -NRa-. Therefore, by way of example and not limitation, R3, R4, R5, R6, R11 or R12 could represent moieties such as -CH2OCH3, -CH2OCH2CH3, -CH2OCH(CH3)2, -CH2SCH3, - (CH2)6OCH3, -(CH2)6N(CH3)2 and the like.
In another embodiment, Formulas I-III is a compound selected from the group
Figure imgf000041_0001
Figure imgf000042_0001
Figure imgf000043_0001
Figure imgf000044_0001
43
Figure imgf000045_0001
Figure imgf000046_0001

Figure imgf000047_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof.
In another embodiment, provided is a compound useful for the synthesis of the compounds of Formula I selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000047_0002
thereof.
DEFINITIONS
Unless stated otherwise, the following terms and phrases as used herein are intended to have the following meanings:
When trade names are used herein, applicants intend to independently include the trade name product and the active pharmaceutical ingredient(s) of the trade name product.
As used herein, "a compound of the invention" or "a compound of Formula I" means a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof. Similarly, with respect to isolatable intermediates, the phrase "a compound of Formula (number)" means a compound of that formula and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, thereof.
"Alkyl" is hydrocarbon containing normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic carbon atoms. For example, an alkyl group can have 1 to 20 carbon atoms (i.e., C1-C20 alkyl), 1 to 8 carbon atoms (i.e., Cj-Cg alkyl), or 1 to 6 carbon atoms (i.e., Ci-Ce alkyl). Examples of suitable alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl (Me, - CH3), ethyl (Et, -CH2CH3), 1 -propyl (n-Pr, n-propyl, -CH2CH2CH3), 2-propyl (i-Pr, i-propyl, -CH(CH3)2), 1 -butyl (n-Bu, n-butyl, -CH2CH2CH2CH3), 2-methyl- 1 -propyl (i-Bu, i-butyl, -CH2CH(CH3)2), 2-butyl (s-Bu, s-butyl, -CH(CH3)CH2CH3), 2-methyl-
2- propyl (t-Bu, t-butyl, -C(CH3)3), 1-pentyl (n-pentyl, -CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3), 2- pentyl (-CH(CH3)CH2CH2CH3), 3-pentyl (-CH(CH2CH3)2), 2-methyl-2-butyl (-C(CH3)2CH2CH3), 3-methyl-2-butyl (-CH(CH3)CH(CH3)2), 3-methyl-l -butyl (-CH2C¾CH(CH3)2), 2-methyl- 1 -butyl (-C¾CH(CH3)CH2CH3), 1 -hexyl
(-CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3), 2-hexyl (-CH(CH3)CH2CH2CH2CH3), 3-hexyl (- CH(CH2CH3)(CH2CH2CH3)), 2-methyl-2-pentyl (-C(CH3)2CH2CH2CH3), 3-methyl-2- pentyl (-CH(CH3)CH(CH3)CH2CH3), 4-methyl-2-pentyl (-CH(CH3)CH2CH(CH3)2),
3- methyl-3-pentyl (-C(CH3)(CH2CH3)2), 2-methyl-3-pentyl (- CH(CH2CH3)CH(CH3)2), 2,3-dimethyl-2-butyl (-C(CH3)2CH(CH3)2), 3,3-dimethyl-2- butyl (-CH(CH3)C(CH3)3, and octyl (-(CH2)7CH3).
"Alkoxy" means a group having the formula -O-alkyl, in which an alkyl group, as defined above, is attached to the parent molecule via an oxygen atom. The alkyl portion of an alkoxy group can have 1 to 20 carbon atoms (i.e., C1-C20 alkoxy), \ to 12 carbon atoms(z'.e., Ci-CJ2 alkoxy), or 1 to 6 carbon atoms(i.e., C1-C6 alkoxy). Examples of suitable alkoxy groups include, but are not limited to, methoxy (-0-CH3 or -OMe), ethoxy (-OCH2CH3 or -OEt), t-butoxy (-0-C(CH3)3 or -OtBu) and the like.
"Haloalkyl" is an alkyl group, as defined above, in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group is replaced with a halogen atom. The alkyl portion of a haloalkyl group can have 1 to 20 carbon atoms (i.e., C1-C20 haloalkyl), 1 to 12 carbon atoms(/.e., C1-C12 haloalkyl), or 1 to 6 carbon atoms(7.e., Ci-C alkyl). Examples of suitable haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, -CF3, -CHF2, -CFH2, -CH2CF3, and the like.
"Alkenyl" is a hydrocarbon containing normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic carbon atoms with at least one site of unsaturation, i.e. a carbon-carbon, sp2 double bond. For example, an alkenyl group can have 2 to 20 carbon atoms (i.e., C2-C2o alkenyl), 2 to 8 carbon atoms (i.e., C2-Cg alkenyl), or 2 to 6 carbon atoms (i.e., C2-C6 alkenyl). Examples of suitable alkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethylene or vinyl (-CH=CH2), allyl (-CH2CH=CH2), cyclopentenyl (-C5H7), and 5-hexenyl (-CH2CH2CH2CH2CH=CH2) .
"Alkynyl" is a hydrocarbon containing normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic carbon atoms with at least one site of unsaturation, i.e. a carbon-carbon, sp triple bond. For example, an alkynyl group can have 2 to 20 carbon atoms (i.e., C2-C20 alkynyl), 2 to 8 carbon atoms (i.e., C2-C8 alkyne,), or 2 to 6 carbon atoms (i.e. , C2-C6 alkynyl). Examples of suitable alkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, acetylenic (-C≡CH), propargyl (-CH2C≡CH), and the like.
"Alkylene" refers to a saturated, branched or straight chain or cyclic hydrocarbon radical having two monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of two hydrogen atoms from the same or two different carbon atoms of a parent alkane. For example, an alkylene group can have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Typical alkylene radicals include, but are not limited to, methylene (-CH2-), 1,1-ethyl (-CH(CH3)-), 1,2-ethyl (-C¾CH2-), 1,1-propyl (-CH(CH2CH3)-), 1,2-propyl (-CH2CH(CH3)-), 1 ,3-propyl (-CH2CH2CH2-), 1,4-butyl (-CH2CH2CH2CH2-), and the like.
"Alkenylene" refers to an unsaturated, branched or straight chain or cyclic hydrocarbon radical having two monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of two hydrogen atoms from the same or two different carbon atoms of a parent alkene. For example, and alkenylene group can have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Typical alkenylene radicals include, but are not limited to, 1,2- ethylene (-CH=CH-).
"Alkynylene" refers to an unsaturated, branched or straight chain or cyclic hydrocarbon radical having two monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of two hydrogen atoms from the same or two different carbon atoms of a parent alkyne. For example, an alkynylene group can have 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Typical alkynylene radicals include, but are not limited to, acetylene (-OC-), propargyl (-CH2C≡C-), and 4-pentynyl (-CH2CH2CH2C≡C-).
"Amino" refers generally to a nitrogen radical which can be considered a derivative of ammonia, having the formula -N(X)2, where each "X" is independently H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, etc. The hybridization of the nitrogen is approximately sp3. Nonlimiting types of amino include -N¾, -N(alkyl)2, -NH(alkyl), -N(carbocyclyl)2, - NH(carbocyclyl), -N(heterocyclyl)2, -NH(heterocyclyl), -N(aryl)2, -NH(aryl), - N(alkyl)(aryl), -N(alkyl)(heterocyclyl), -N(carbocyclyl)(heterocyclyl), - N(aryl)(heteroaryl), -N(alkyl)(heteroaryl), etc. The term "alkylamino" refers to an amino group substituted with at least one alkyl group. Nonlimiting examples of amino groups include -NH2, -NH(C¾), -N(CH3)2, -NH(CH2CH3), - N(CH2CH3)2, - NH(phenyl), -N(phenyl)2> -NH(benzyl), -N(benzyl)2, etc. Substituted alkylamino refers generally to alkylamino groups, as defined above, in which at least one substituted alkyl, as defined herein, is attached to the amino nitrogen atom. Non-limiting examples of substituted alkylamino includes -NH(alkylene-C(0)-OH), -NH(alkylene-C(0)-0-alkyl), -N(alkylene-C(0)-OH)2, -N(alkylene-C(0)-0-alkyl)2, etc.
"Aryl" means an aromatic hydrocarbon radical derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent aromatic ring system. For example, an aryl group can have 6 to 20 carbon atoms, 6 to 14 carbon atoms, or 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Typical aryl groups include, but are not limited to, radicals derived from benzene (e.g., phenyl), substituted benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, biphenyl, and the like.
"Arylalkyl" refers to an acyclic alkyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp3 carbon atom, is replaced with an aryl radical. Typical arylalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, benzyl, 2-phenylethan-l-yl, naphthylmethyl, 2-naphthylethan-l-yl, naphthobenzyl, 2-naphthophenylethan-l-yl and the like. The arylalkyl group can comprise 7 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkyl moiety is 1 to 6 carbon atoms and the aryl moiety is 6 to 14 carbon atoms.
"Arylalkenyl" refers to an acyclic alkenyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp3 carbon atom, but also an sp2 carbon atom, is replaced with an aryl radical. The aryl portion of the arylalkenyl can include, for example, any of the aryl groups disclosed herein, and the alkenyl portion of the arylalkenyl can include, for example, any of the alkenyl groups disclosed herein. The arylalkenyl group can comprise 8 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkenyl moiety is 2 to 6 carbon atoms and the aryl moiety is 6 to 14 carbon atoms.
"Arylalkynyl" refers to an acyclic alkynyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp3 carbon atom, but also an sp carbon atom, is replaced with an aryl radical. The aryl portion of the arylalkynyl can include, for example, any of the aryl groups disclosed herein, and the alkynyl portion of the arylalkynyl can include, for example, any of the alkynyl groups disclosed herein. The arylalkynyl group can comprise 8 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkynyl moiety is 2 to 6 carbon atoms and the aryl moiety is 6 to 14 carbon atoms.
The term "substituted" in reference to alkyl, alkylene, aryl, arylalkyl, alkoxy, heterocyolyl, heteroaryl, carbocyclyl, etc. , for example, "substituted alkyl", "substituted alkylene", "substituted aryl", "substituted arylalkyl", "substituted heterocyclyl", and "substituted carbocyclyl", unless otherwise indicated, means alkyl, alkylene, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, carbocyclyl respectively, in which one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently replaced with a non-hydrogen substituent. Typical substituents include, but are not limited to, -X, -Rb, -O", =0, -ORb, -SRb, -S", -NRb 2, -N+Rb 3, =NRb, -CX3, -CN, -OCN, -SCN, -N=C=0, -NCS, -NO, -N02, =N2, -N3, -NHC(=0)R , -OC(=0)Rb, -NHC(=0)NRb 2, -S(=0)2-, -S(=0)2OH, -S(=0)2Rb, -OS(=0)2ORb, -S(=0)2NRb 2, -S(=0)Rb, -OP(=0)(ORb)2, -P(=0)(ORb)2, -P(=0)(0_)2, -P(=0)(OH)2, -P(0)(ORb)(Cr), -C(=0)Rb, -C(=0)X, -C(S)Rb, -C(0)ORb, -C(0)0\ -C(S)ORb, -C(0)SRb, -C(S)SR , -C(0)NRb 2, -C(S)NR 2, -C(=NRb)NR 2, where each X is independently a halogen: F, CI, Br, or I; and each Rb is independently H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, a heterocycle, or a protecting group or prodrug moiety. Alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene groups may also be similarly substituted. Unless otherwise indicated, when the term "substituted" is used in conjunction with groups such as arylalkyl, which have two or more moieties capable of substitution, the substituents can be attached to the aryl moiety, the alkyl moiety, or both.
The term "prodrug" as used herein refers to any compound that when administered to a biological system generates the drug substance, i.e., active ingredient, as a result of spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme catalyzed chemical reaction(s), photolysis, and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s). A prodrug is thus a covalently modified analog or latent form of a therapeutically active compound.
One skilled in the art will recognize that substituents and other moieties of the compounds of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI should be selected in order to provide a compound which is sufficiently stable to provide a pharmaceutically useful compound which can be formulated into an acceptably stable pharmaceutical composition. The definitions and substituents for various genus and subgenus of the present compounds are described and illustrated herein. It should be understood by one skilled in the art that any combination of the definitions and substituents described above should not result in an inoperable species or compound. "Inoperable species or compounds" means compound structures that violates relevant scientific principles (such as, for example, a carbon atom connecting to more than four covalent bonds) or compounds too unstable to permit isolation and formulation into pharmaceutically acceptable dosage forms.
"Heteroalkyl" refers to an alkyl group where one or more carbon atoms have been replaced with a heteroatom, such as, O, N, or S. For example, if the carbon atom of the alkyl group which is attached to the parent molecule is replaced with a heteroatom (e.g., O, N, or S) the resulting heteroalkyl groups are, respectively, an alkoxy group (e.g., -OCH3, etc.), an amine (e.g., -NHCH3, -N(CH3)2, etc.), or a thioalkyl group (e.g., -SCH3). If a non-terminal carbon atom of the alkyl group which is not attached to the parent molecule is replaced with a heteroatom (e.g., O, N, or S) the resulting heteroalkyl groups are, respectively, an alkyl ether (e.g., -CH2CH2-O-CH3, etc.), an alkyl amine (e.g., -CH2NHCH3, -CH2N(CH3)2, etc.), or a thioalkyl ether (e.g,-CH2-S-CH3). If a terminal carbon atom of the alkyl group is replaced with a heteroatom (e.g., O, N, or S), the resulting heteroalkyl groups are, respectively, a hydroxyalkyl group (e.g.,
-CH2CH2-OH), an aminoalkyl group (e.g., -CH2NH2), or an alkyl thiol group (e.g., -CH2CH2-SH). A heteroalkyl group can have, for example, 1 to 20 carbon atoms, 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms. A C\-C(, heteroalkyl group means aheteroalkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. "Heterocycle" or "heterocyclyl" as used herein includes by way of example and not limitation those heterocycles described in Paquette, Leo A.; Principles of Modern Heterocyclic Chemistry (W.A. Benjamin, New York, 1968), particularly Chapters 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 9; The Chemistry of Heterocyclic Compounds, A Series of Monographs" (John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1950 to present), in particular Volumes 13, 14, 16, 19, and 28; and J. Am. Chem. Soc. (1960) 82:5566. In one specific embodiment of the invention "heterocycle" includes a "carbocycle" as defined herein, wherein one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, or 4) carbon atoms have been replaced with a heteroatom (e.g. O, N, or S). The terms "heterocycle" or
"heterocyclyl" includes saturated rings, partially unsaturated rings, and aromatic rings (i.e., heteroaromatic rings). Substituted heterocyclyls include, for example, heterocyclic rings substituted with any of the substituents disclosed herein including carbonyl groups. A non-limiting example of a carbonyl substituted heterocyclyl is:
Figure imgf000054_0001
Examples of heterocycles include by way of example and not limitation pyridyl, dihydroypyridyl, tetrahydropyridyl (piperidyl), thiazolyl,
tetrahydrothiophenyl, sulfur oxidized tetrahydrothiophenyl, pyrimidinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl, benzofuranyl, thianaphthalenyl, indolyl, indolenyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, piperidinyl, 4- piperidonyl, pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidonyl, pyrrolinyl, tetrahydrofurairyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl,
octahydroisoquinolinyl, azocinyl, triazinyl, 6H-l,2,5-thiadiazinyl, 2H,6H-1,5,2- dithiazinyl, thienyl, thianthrenyl, pyranyl, isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl, phenoxathinyl, 2H-pyrrolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, lH-indazoly, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH- carbazolyl, carbazolyl, fl-carbolinyl, phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, pyrimidinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenotliiazinyl, furazanyl, phenoxazinyl, isochromanyl, chromanyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, piperazinyl, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, quinuclidinyl, morpholinyl, oxazolidinyl, benzotriazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, oxindolyl, benzoxazo isatinoyl, and bis-tetrahydrofuranyl:
Figure imgf000055_0001
By way of example and not limitation, carbon bonded heterocycies are bonded at position 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 of a pyridine, position 3, 4, 5, or 6 of a pyridazine, position 2, 4, 5, or 6 of a pyrimidine, position 2, 3, 5, or 6 of a pyrazine, position 2, 3, 4, or 5 of a furan, tetrahydrofuran, thiofuran, thiophene, pyrrole or tetrahydropyrrole, position 2, 4, or 5 of an oxazole, imidazole or thiazole, position 3, 4, or 5 of an isoxazole, pyrazole, or isothiazole, position 2 or 3 of an aziridine, position 2, 3, or 4 of an azetidine, position 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 of a quinoline or position 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 of an isoquinoline. Still more typically, carbon bonded heterocycies include 2- pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 5-pyridyl, 6-pyridyl, 3-pyridazinyl, 4-pyridazinyl, 5- pyridazinyl, 6-pyridazinyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 4-pyrimidinyl, 5-pyrimidinyl, 6- pyrimidinyl, 2-pyrazinyl, 3-pyrazinyl, 5-pyrazinyl, 6-pyrazinyl, 2-thiazolyl, 4- thiazolyl, or 5-thiazolyl.
By way of example and not limitation, nitrogen bonded heterocycies are bonded at position 1 of an aziridine, azetidine, pyrrole, pyrrolidine, 2-pyrroline, 3- pyrroline, imidazole, imidazolidine, 2 -imidazoline, 3 -imidazoline, pyrazole, pyrazoline, 2-pyrazoline, 3-pyrazoline, pipeiidine, piperazine, indole, indoline, 1H- indazole, position 2 of a isoindole, or isoindoline, position 4 of a morpholine, and position 9 of a carbazole, or β-carboline. Still more typically, nitrogen bonded heterocycies include 1-aziridyl, 1-azetedyl, 1-pyrrolyl, 1 -imidazolyl, 1-pyrazolyl, and 1 -piped dinyl.
"Heterocyclylalkyl" refers to an acyclic alkyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp3 carbon atom, is replaced with a heterocyclyl radical (i.e., a heterocyclyl-alkylene- moiety). Typical heterocyclyl alkyl groups include, but are not limited to heterocyclyl-CEt-, 2- (heterocyolyl)ethan-l-yl, and the like, wherein the "heterocyclyl" portion includes any of the heterocyclyl groups described above, including those described in Principles of Modem Heterocyclic Chemistry, One skilled in the art will also understand that the heterocyclyl group can be attached to the alkyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkyl by means of a carbon-carbon bond or a carbon-heteroatom bond, with the proviso that the resulting group is chemically stable. The heterocyclyl alkyl group comprises 3 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkyl portion of the arylalkyl group is 1 to 6 carbon atoms and the heterocyclyl moiety is 2 to 14 carbon atoms. Examples of heterocyclylalkyls include by way of example and not limitation 5-membered sulfur, oxygen, and/or nitrogen containing heterocycles such as thiazolylmethyl, 2-thiazolylethan-l-yl, imidazolylmethyl, oxazolylmethyl, thiadiazolylmethyl, etc., 6-membered sulfur, oxygen, and/or nitrogen containing heterocycles such as piperidinylmethyl, piperazinylmethyl, morpholinylmethyl, pyridinylmethyl, pyridizylmethyl, pyrimidylmethyl, pyrazinylmethyl, etc.
"Heterocyclylalkenyl" refers to an acyclic alkenyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp3 carbon atom, but also a sp2 carbon atom, is replaced with a heterocyclyl radical (i.e., a heterocyclyl- alkenylene- moiety). The heterocyclyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkenyl group includes any of the heterocyclyl groups described herein, including those described in Principles of Modern Heterocyclic Chemistry, and the alkenyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkenyl group includes any of the alkenyl groups disclosed herein. One skilled in the art will also understand that the heterocyclyl group can be attached to the alkenyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkenyl by means of a carbon-carbon bond or a carbon-heteroatom bond, with the proviso that the resulting group is chemically stable. The heterocyclyl alkenyl group comprises 4 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkenyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkenyl group is 2 to 6 carbon atoms and the heterocyclyl moiety is 2 to 14 carbon atoms.
"Heterocyclylalkynyl" refers to an acyclic alkynyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp3 carbon atom, but also an sp carbon atom, is replaced with a heterocyclyl radical (i.e., a heterocyclyl - alkynylene- moiety). The heterocyclyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkynyl group includes any of the heterocyclyl groups described herein, including those described in Principles of Modern Heterocyclic Chemistry, and the alkynyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkynyl group includes any of the alkynyl groups disclosed herein. One skilled in the art will also understand that the heterocyclyl group can be attached to the alkynyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkynyl by means of a carbon-carbon bond or a carbon-heteroatom bond, with the proviso that the resulting group is chemically stable. The heterocyclyl alkynyl group comprises 4 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkynyl portion of the heterocyclyl alkynyl group is 2 to 6 carbon atoms and the heterocyclyl moiety is 2 to 14 carbon atoms.
"Heteroaryl" refers to an aromatic heterocyclyl having at least one heteroatom in the ring. Non-limiting examples of suitable heteroatoms which can be included in the aromatic ring include oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen. Non-limiting examples of heteroaryl rings include all of those aromatic rings listed in the definition of "heterocyclyl", including pyridinyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, purinyl, furanyl, thienyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, carbazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, pyridazyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazyl, etc.
"Carbocycle" or "carbocyclyl" refers to a saturated (i.e., cycloalkyl), partially unsaturated (e.g., cycloakenyl, cycloalkadienyl, etc.) or aromatic ring having 3 to 7 carbon atoms as a monocycle, 7 to 12 carbon atoms as a bicycle, and up to about 20 carbon atoms as a polycycle. Monocyclic carbocycles have 3 to 7 ring atoms, still more typically 5 or 6 ring atoms. Bicyclic carbocycles have 7 to 12 ring atoms, e.g., arranged as a bicyclo [4,5], [5,5], [5,6] or [6,6] system, or 9 or 10 ring atoms arranged as a bicyclo [5,6] or [6,6] system, or spiro-fused rings. Non-limiting examples of monocyclic carbocycles include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, 1-cyclopent-l- enyl, l-cyclopent-2-enyl, l-cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclohexyl, 1-cyclohex-l-enyl, 1- cyclohex-2-enyl, l-cyclohex-3-enyl, and phenyl. Non-limiting examples of bicyclo carbocycles includes naphthyl, tetrahydronapthalene, and decaline.
"Carbocyclylalkyl" refers to an acyclic alkyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom is replaced with a carbocyclyl radical as described herein. Typical, but non-limiting, examples of carbocyclylalkyl groups include cyclopropylmethyl, cyclopropylethyl, cyclobutylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl and cyclohexylmethyl.
"Arylheteroalkyl" refers to a heteroalkyl as defined herein, in which a hydrogen atom (which may be attached either to a carbon atom or a heteroatom) has been replaced with an aryl group as defined herein. The aryl groups may be bonded to a carbon atom of the heteroalkyl group, or to a heteroatom of the heteroalkyl group, provided that the resulting arylheteroalkyl group provides a chemically stable moiety. For example, an arylheteroalkyl group can have the general formulae -alkylene- O-aryl, -alkylene-O-alkylene-aryl, -alkylene-NH-aryl, -alkylene-NH-alkylene-aryl, -alkylene-S-aryl, -alkylene-S-alkylene-aryl, etc. In addition, any of the alkylene moieties in the general formulae above can be further substituted with any of the substituents defined or exemplified herein.
"Heteroarylalkyi" refers to an alkyl group, as defined herein, in which a hydrogen atom has been replaced with a heteroaryl group as defined herein. Non- limiting examples of heteroaryl alkyl include -CH2-pyridinyl, -CH2-pyrrolyl, -CH2-oxazolyl, -CH2-indolyl, -CH2-isoindolyl, -CH2-purinyl, -CH2-furanyl, -CFb-thienyl, -C¾-benzofuranyl, -CH2-benzothiophenyl, -CH2-carbazolyl, -CI¾-imidazolyl, -CH2-thiazolyl, -CH2-isoxazolyl, -CH2-pyrazolyl, -CH2-isothiazolyl, -CH2-quinolyl, -CH2-isoquinolyl, -CH2-pyridazyl, -CH2-pyrimidyl, -CH2-pyrazyl, -CH(CH3)-pyridinyl, -CH(CH3)-pyrrolyl, -CH(CH3)-oxazolyl, -CH(CH3)-indolyl, -CH(CH3)-isoindolyl, -CH(CH3)-purinyl, -CH(CH3)-furanyl, -CH(CH3)-thienyl, -CH(CH3)-benzofuranyl, -CH(CH3)-benzothiophenyl, -CH(CH3)-carbazolyl, -CH(CH3)-imidazolyl, -CH(CH3)-thiazolyl, -CH(CH3)-isoxazolyl,
-CH(CH3)-pyrazolyl, -CH(CH3)-isothiazolyl, -CH(CH3)-quinolyl,
-CH(CH3)-isoquinolyl, -CH(CH3)-pyridazyl, -CH(CH3)-pyrimidyl,
-CH(CH3)-pyrazyl, etc.
The term "optionally substituted" in reference to a particular moiety of the compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI (e.g., an optionally substituted aryl group) refers to a moiety wherein all substituents are hydrogen or wherein one or more of the hydrogens of the moiety may be replaced by substituents such as those listed under the definition of "substituted" or as otherwise indicated.
The term "optionally replaced" in reference to a particular moiety of the compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI (e.g., the carbon atoms of said (Ci- C8)alkyl may be optionally replaced by -0-, -S-, or -NRa-) means that one or more of the methylene groups of the (Ci-C8)alkyl may be replaced by 0, 1, 2, or more of the groups specified (e.g., -0-, -S-, or -NRa-).
The term "non-terminal carbon atom(s)" in reference to an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkylene, alkenylene, or alkynylene moiety refers to the carbon atoms in the moiety that intervene between the first carbon atom of the moiety and the last carbon atom in the moiety. Therefore, by way of example and not limitation, in the alkyl moiety -CH2(C*)H2(C*)H2CH3 or alkylene moiety -CH2(C*)H2(C*)H2CH2- the C* atoms would be considered to be the non-terminal carbon atoms.
Certain Y and Y1 alternatives are nitrogen oxides such as ¾1(0)(Κ) or ^(OXOR). These nitrogen oxides, as shown here attached to a carbon atom, can also
O " O " be represented by charge separated groups such as R or 0R , respectively, and are intended to be equivalent to the aforementioned representations for the purposes of describing this invention.
"Linker" or "link" means a chemical moiety comprising a covalent bond or a chain of atoms. Linkers include repeating units of alkyloxy (e.g. polyethyleneoxy, PEG, polymethyleneoxy) and alkylamino (e.g. polyethyleneamino, Jeffamine™); and diacid ester and amides including succinate, succinamide, diglycolate, malonate, and caproamide.
The terms such as "oxygen-linked", "nitrogen-linked", "carbon-linked", "sulfur-linked", or "phosphorous-linked" mean that if a bond between two moieties can be formed by using more than one type of atom in a moiety, then the bond formed between the moieties is through the atom specified. For example, a nitrogen-linked amino acid would be bonded through a nitrogen atom of the amino acid rather than through an oxygen or carbon atom of the amino acid.
Unless otherwise specified, the carbon atoms of the compounds of Formula I- III and Formula IV- VI are intended to have a valence of four. In some chemical structure representations where carbon atoms do not have a sufficient number of variables attached to produce a valence of four, the remaining carbon substituents umed to be hydrogen. For example,
the same meaning as
Figure imgf000060_0001
"Protecting group" refers to a moiety of a compound that masks or alters the properties of a functional group or the properties of the compound as a whole. The chemical substructure of a protecting group varies widely. One function of a protecting group is to serve as an intermediate in the synthesis of the parental drug substance. Chemical protecting groups and strategies for protection/deprotection are well known in the art. See: "Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry", Theodora W. Greene (John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1991. Protecting groups are often utilized to mask the reactivity of certain functional groups, to assist in the efficiency of desired chemical reactions, e.g. making and breaking chemical bonds in an ordered and planned fashion. Protection of functional groups of a compound alters other physical properties besides the reactivity of the protected functional group, such as the polarity, lipophilicity (hydrophobicity), and other properties which can be measured by common analytical tools. Chemically protected intermediates may themselves be biologically active or inactive.
Protected compounds may also exhibit altered, and in some cases, optimized properties in vitro and in vivo, such as passage through cellular membranes and resistance to enzymatic degradation or sequestration. In this role, protected compounds with intended therapeutic effects may be referred to as prodrugs. Another function of a protecting group is to convert the parental drug into a prodrug, whereby the parental drug is released upon conversion of the prodrug in vivo. Because active prodrugs may be absorbed more effectively than the parental drug, prodrugs may possess greater potency in vivo than the parental drug. Protecting groups are removed either in vitro, in the instance of chemical intermediates, or in vivo, in the case of prodrugs. With chemical intermediates, it is not particularly important that the resulting products after deprotection, e.g. alcohols, be physiologically acceptable, although in general it is more desirable if the products are pharmacologically innocuous.
"Prodrug moiety" means a labile functional group which separates from the active inhibitory compound during metabolism, systemically, inside a cell, by hydrolysis, enzymatic cleavage, or by some other process (Bundgaard, Hans, "Design and Application of Prodrugs" in Textbook of Drug Design and Development (1991), P. Krogsgaard-Larsen and H. Bundgaard, Eds. Harwood Academic Publishers, pp. 113- 191). Enzymes which are capable of an enzymatic activation mechanism with the phosphonate prodrug compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to, amidases, esterases, microbial enzymes, phospholipases, cholinesterases, and phosphases. Prodrug moieties can serve to enhance solubility, absorption and lipophilicity to optimize drug delivery, bioavailability and efficacy.
A prodrug moiety may include an active metabolite or drug itself. Exemplary prodrug moieties include the hydrolytically sensitive or labile acyloxymethyl esters -CH20C(=0)R30 and acyloxymethyl carbonates
-C¾OC(=0)OR30 where R30 is C,-C6 alkyl, d-C6 substituted alkyl, C6-C2o aryl or substituted aryl. The acyloxyalkyl ester was used as a prodrug strategy for carboxylic acids and then applied to phosphates and phosphonates by Farquhar et al (1983) J. Pharm. Sci. 72: 324; also US Patent Nos. 4816570, 4968788, 5663159 and 5792756. In certain compounds of the invention, a prodrug moiety is part of a phosphate group. The acyloxyalkyl ester may be used to deliver phosphoric acids across cell membranes and to enhance oral bioavailability. A close variant of the acyloxyalkyl ester, the alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl ester (carbonate), may also enhance oral bioavailability as a prodrug moiety in the compounds of the combinations of the invention. An exemplary acyloxymethyl ester is pivaloyloxymethoxy, (POM) -CH20C(=0)C(CH3)3. An exemplary acyloxymethyl carbonate prodrug moiety is pivaloyloxymethylcarbonate (POC) -CH2OC(=0)OC(CH3)3.
The phosphate group may be a phosphate prodrug moiety. The prodrug moiety may be sensitive to hydrolysis, such as, but not limited to those comprising a pivaloyloxymethyl carbonate (POC) or POM group. Alternatively, the prodrug moiety may be sensitive to enzymatic potentiated cleavage, such as a lactate ester or a phosphonamidate-ester group.
Aryl esters of phosphorus groups, especially phenyl esters, are reported to enhance oral bioavailability (DeLambert et al (1994) J. Med. Chem. 37: 498). Phenyl esters containing a carboxylic ester ortho to the phosphate have also been described (Khamnei and Torrence, (1996) J. Med. Chem. 39:4109-4115). Benzyl esters are reported to generate the parent phosphonic acid. In some cases, substituents at the ortho-ox para-position may accelerate the hydrolysis. Benzyl analogs with an acylated phenol or an alkylated phenol may generate the phenolic compound through the action of enzymes, e.g. esterases, oxidases, etc., which in turn undergoes cleavage at the benzylic C-0 bond to generate the phosphoric acid and the quinone methide intermediate. Examples of this class of prodrugs are described by Mitchell et al (1992) J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. J2345; Brook et al WO 91/19721. Still other benzylic prodrugs have been described containing a carboxylic ester-containing group attached to the benzylic methylene (Glazier et al WO 91/1 721). Thio-containing prodrugs are reported to be useful for the intracellular delivery of phosphonate drugs. These proesters contain an ethylthio group in which the thiol group is either esterified with an acyl group or combined with another thiol group to form a disulfide.
Deesterification or reduction of the disulfide generates the free thio intermediate which subsequently breaks down to the phosphoric acid and episulfide (Puech et al (1993) Antiviral Res., 22: 155-174; Benzaria et al (1996) J. Med. Chem. 39: 4958). Cyclic phosphonate esters have also been described as prodrugs of phosphorus- containing compounds (Erion et al, US Patent No. 6312662).
It is to be noted that all enantiomers, diastereomers, and racemic mixtures, tautomers, polymorphs, pseudopolymorphs of compounds within the scope of Formula I, Formula II, Formula III, Formula IV, Formula V, or Formula VI and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof are embraced by the present invention. All mixtures of such enantiomers and diastereomers are within the scope of the present invention.
A compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI and its pharmaceutically acceptable salts may exist as different polymorphs or pseudopolymorphs. As used herein, crystalline polymorphism means the ability of a crystalline compound to exist in different crystal structures. The crystalline polymorphism may result from differences in crystal packing (packing polymorphism) or differences in packing between different conformers of the same molecule (conformational polymorphism). As used herein, crystalline pseudopolymorphism means the ability of a hydrate or solvate of a compound to exist in different crystal structures. The pseudopolymorphs of the instant invention may exist due to differences in crystal packing (packing pseudopolymorphism) or due to differences in packing between different conformers of the same molecule (conformational pseudopolymorphism). The instant invention comprises all polymorphs and pseudopolymorphs of the compounds of Formula Ι-ΙΠ and Formula IV-VI and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts. A compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI and its pharmaceutically acceptable salts may also exist as an amorphous solid. As used herein, an amorphous solid is a solid in which there is no long-range order of the positions of the atoms in the solid. This definition applies as well when the crystal size is two nanometers or less. Additives, including solvents, may be used to create the amorphous forms of the instant invention. The instant invention comprises all amorphous forms of the compounds of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
Selected substituents comprising the compounds of Formula I-III and Formula rV-VI are present to a recursive degree. In this context, "recursive substituent" means that a substituent may recite another instance of itself. Because of the recursive nature of such substituents, theoretically, a large number of compounds may be present in any given embodiment. For example, R* comprises a Ry substituent. Ry can be R. R can be W3. W3 can be W4 and W4 can be R or comprise substituents comprising Ry. One of ordinary skill in the art of medicinal chemistry understands that the total number of such substituents is reasonably limited by the desired properties of the compound intended. Such properties include, by way of example and not limitation, physical properties such as molecular weight, solubility or log P, application properties such as activity against the intended target, and practical properties such as ease of synthesis.
By way of example and not limitation, W3 and Ry are recursive substituents in certain embodiments. Typically, each recursive substituent can independently occur 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, or 0, times in a given embodiment. More typically, each recursive substituent can independently occur 12 or fewer times in a given embodiment. Even more typically, each recursive substituent can independently occur 3 or fewer times in a given embodiment. For example, W3 will occur 0 to 8 times, Ry will occur 0 to 6 times in a given embodiment. Even more typically, W3 will occur 0 to 6 times and Ry will occur 0 to 4 times in a given embodiment. Recursive substituents are an intended aspect of the invention. One of ordinary skill in the art of medicinal chemistry understands the versatility of such substituents. To the degree that recursive substituents are present in an embodiment of the invention, the total number will be determined as set forth above.
The modifier "about" used in connection with a quantity is inclusive of the stated value and has the meaning dictated by the context (e.g., includes the degree of error associated with measurement of the particular quantity).
The compounds of the Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI may comprise a
Y
II phosphate group as R7, which may be a prodrug moiety w2 wherein each Y or Y1 is, independently, O, S, NR, ^(OXR), N(O ), +N(0)(OR), or N-NR2; W1 and W2, when taken together, are -Y (C(Ry)2)3Y3-; or one of W1 or W2 together with either R3or R4 is -Y3- and the other of W1 or W2 is Formula la; or W1 and W2 are each, independently, a group of Formula la:
Figure imgf000065_0001
wherein:
each Y2 is independently a bond, O, CR2, NR, +N(0)(R), N(OR), +N(0)(OR),
N-NR2, S, S-S, S(O), or S(0)2;
each Y3 is independently O, S, orNR;
M2 is 0, 1 or 2;
each Ry is independently H, F, CI, Br, I, OH, R, -C(=Y')R, -C(=Y')0R, - C(=Y')N(R)2, -N(R)2, - N(R)3, -SR, -S(0)R, -S(0)2R, -S(0)(OR), -S(0)2(OR), - OC(=Y')R, -OC(=Y')OR, -OC^Y'XNiRW, -SC(=Y')R, -SC(=Y')OR, - SC(=Y')(N(R)2), -r^C^Y^R, -N(R)C(=Y')OR, or -N(R)C(=Y1)N(R)2, -S02NR2, -CN, -N3, -N02, -OR, a protecting group or W3; or when taken together, two Ry on the same carbon atom form a carbocyclic ring of 3 to 7 carbon atoms;
each Rx is inde endently Ry, a protecting group, or the formula:
Figure imgf000066_0001
wherein:
Mi a, Ml c, and Mid are independently 0 or 1;
M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12;
each R is H, halogen, (Ci-C3) alkyl, (CrCg) substituted alkyl, (C2-C3) alkenyl, (C2-Cs) substituted alkenyl, (C2-Cg) alkynyl, (C2-C8) substituted alkynyl, C6-C2o aryl, C6-C2o substituted aryl, C2-C20 heterocycle, C2-C20 substituted heterocyclyl, arylalkyl, substituted arylalkyl or a protecting group;
W3 is W4 or W5; W4 is R, -C(Y!)Ry, -C(Y')W5, -S02Ry, or -S02W5; and W5 is a carbocycle or a heterocycle wherein W5 is independently substituted with 0 to 3 Ry groups.
W5 carbocycles and W5 heterocycles may be independently substituted with 0 to 3 Ry groups. W5 may be a saturated, unsaturated or aromatic ring comprising a mono- or bicyclic carbocycle or heterocycle. W5 may have 3 to 10 ring atoms, e.g., 3 to 7 ring atoms. The W5 rings are saturated when containing 3 ring atoms, saturated or mono-unsaturated when containing 4 ring atoms, saturated, or mono- or di- unsaturated when containing 5 ring atoms, and saturated, mono- or di-unsaturated, or aromatic when containing 6 ring atoms.
A W3 heterocycle may be a monocycle having 3 to 7 ring members (2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, and S) or a bicycle having 7 to 10 ring members (4 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, and S). W5 heterocyclic monocycles may have 3 to 6 ring atoms (2 to 5 carbon atoms and 1 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S); or 5 or 6 ring atoms (3 to 5 carbon atoms and 1 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N and S). W5 heterocyclic bicycles have 7 to 10 ring atoms (6 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 2 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S) arranged as a bicyclo [4,5], [5,5], [5,6], or [6,6] system; or 9 to 10 ring atoms (8 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 2 hetero atoms selected from N and S) arranged as a bicyclo [5,6] or [6,6] system. The W5 heterocycle may be bonded to Y2 through a carbon, nitrogen, sulfur or other atom by a stable covalent bond.
W5 heterocycles include for example, pyridyl, dihydropyridyl isomers, piperidine, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, s-triazinyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, furanyl, thiofuranyl, thienyl, and pyrrolyl. W5 also includes, but is not limited to, examples such as:
Figure imgf000067_0001
W5 carbocycles and heterocycles may be independently substituted with 0 to 3 groups, as defined above. For example, substituted W5 carbocycles include:
Figure imgf000068_0001
 Embodiments of R7 or R7 together with R4 include the structures
Figure imgf000069_0001
wherein
a is the point of attachment to R7;
b is the point of attachment to R4;
Ar is phenyl or naphthyl, wherein the phenyl and naphthyl are optionally substituted with 1-3 R20 groups;
each Ry is independently (Ci-Cs) alkyl or C5-C6 carbocyclyl, wherein the alkyl and carbocyclyl are optionally substituted with 1-3 R20 groups;
each R is independently H, (Ci-C6) alkyl, or arylalkyl; and
each R20 is independently halogen, CN, N(R)2, OR, -SR, -S(0)R, -S(0)2R, - S(0)(OR), -S(0)2(OR), -C(=0)R, -C(=0)OR, or C(=0)N(R)2.
Embodiments of
Figure imgf000069_0002
0f Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI compounds include substructures such as:
Figure imgf000070_0001
wherein each Y is, independently, O or N(R). In another aspect of this embo
Figure imgf000070_0002
12c
wherein Ml 2c is 1, 2 or 3 and each Y2 is independently a bond, O, C 2, or S. In another aspect of this embodiment, one Y2b-Rx is NH(R) and the other Y b-Rx is 0- Rx wherein R is:
Figure imgf000070_0003
M12c
wherein M12c is 2. In another aspect of this embodiment, each Y2b is 0 and each R" is
Figure imgf000070_0004
M12c
wherein M12c is 2. In another aspect of this embodiment, each Y b is O and each Rx is independently:
Figure imgf000071_0001
M12c
wherein Ml 2c is 1 and Y2 is a bond, O, or CRi.
Other embodiments
Figure imgf000071_0002
of Formulas I-III and Formulas IV- VI compounds include substructures such as:
Figure imgf000071_0003
wherein each Y is, independently, O or N(R). In another aspect of this embodiment, each Y3 is O. In another aspect of this embodiment, the substructure is:
Figure imgf000071_0004
wherein Ry is W5 as defined herein.
Another embodiment of of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI includes the substructures:
Figure imgf000072_0001
wherein each Y2c is, independently, O, N(Ry) or S.
Y
Another embodiment of w of Formula I- III and Formula IV- VI compounds includes the substructures wherein one of W or W together with either R3 or R4 is -Y3- and the other of W1 or W2 is Formula la. Such an embodiment is represented by a compound of Formula lb selected from :
Figure imgf000072_0002
Figure imgf000073_0001
Formula lb
In another aspect of the embodiment of Formula lb, each Y and Y3 is O. In another aspect of the embodiment of Formula lb, W1 or W2 is Y2b-Rx; each Y, Y3 and Y2bisOand xis:
Figure imgf000073_0002
M12c
wherein Ml 2c is 1, 2 or 3 and each Y2 is independently a bond, O, CR2, or S. In another aspect of the embodiment of Formula lb, W1 or W2 is Y2b-Rx; each Y, Y3 andY2bisOandRxis:
Figure imgf000074_0001
M12c
wherein M12c is 2. In another aspect of the embodiment of Formula lb, W1 or W2 is Y2b-Rx 3 and Y2b is O and Rx is:
Figure imgf000074_0002
M12c
wherein Ml 2c is 1 and Y2 is a bond, O, or CR2.
Another embodiment of
Figure imgf000074_0003
of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI compounds includes a substructure:
Figure imgf000074_0004
wherein W is a carbocycle such as phenyl or substituted phenyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, the substructure is:
Figure imgf000075_0001
wherein Y2b is O or N(R) and the phenyl carbocycle is substituted with 0 to 3 R groups. In another aspect of this embodiment of the substructure, Rxis:
Figure imgf000075_0002
M12c
wherein M12c is 1 , 2 or 3 and each Y2 is independently a bond, O, CR2, or S.
Figure imgf000075_0003
Another embodiment of w of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI includes substructure:
Figure imgf000075_0004
The chiral carbon of the amino acid and lactate moieties maybe either the R S configuration or the racemic mixture.
Another embodiment of
Figure imgf000076_0001
and Formula IV- VI is substructure
Figure imgf000076_0002
wherein each Y2 is, independently, -O- or -NH-. In another aspect of this embodiment, y is (C,-C8) alkyl, (Ci-Cg) substituted alkyl, (C2-C8) alkenyl, (C2-C8) substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8) alkynyl or (C2-C8) substituted alkynyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, Ry is (Ci-C8) alkyl, (Cj-Cs) substituted alkyl, (C2-C8) alkenyl, (C2-C8) substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8) alkynyl or (C2-C8) substituted alkynyl; and R is CH3. In another aspect of this embodiment, Ry is (Ci-Cs) alkyl, (Ci-C8) substituted alkyl, (C2-C8) alkenyl, (C2-C8) substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8) alkynyl or (C2-C8) substituted alkynyl; R is CH3; and each Y2 is -NH-. In a aspect of this embodiment, W1 and W2 are, independently, nitrogen-linked, naturally occurring amino acids or naturally occurring amino acid esters. In another aspect of this embodiment, W1 and W2 are, independently, naturally-occurring 2-hydroxy carboxylic acids or naturally- occurring 2-hydroxy carboxylic acid esters wherein the acid or ester is linked to P through the 2-hydroxy group.
Figure imgf000076_0003
I, Formula II, Formula
III, Formula IV, Formula V, or Formula VI is substructure:
Figure imgf000077_0001
In one aspect of this embodiment, each R is, independently, (Ci-C8) alkyl. In another aspect of this embodiment, each R* is, independently, C6-C2o aryl or C6-C2o substituted aryl.
In a preferred embodiment,
Figure imgf000077_0002
is selected from
Figure imgf000077_0003
Another embodiment of
Figure imgf000078_0001
of Formulas I-III and Formula IV-
VI is substructure
Figure imgf000078_0002
wherein W1 and W2 are independently selected from one of the formulas in Tables 20.1-20.37 and Table 30.1 below. The variables used in Tables 20.1-20.37 (e.g., W23, R21, etc.) pertain only to Tables 20.1-20.37, unless otherwise indicated.
The variables used in Tables 20.1 to 20.37 have the following definitions: each R21 is independently H or (Ci-Cs)alkyl;
each R22 is independently H, R2', R23 or R24 wherein each R24 is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R23;
each R23 is independently R23 , R23b, R23c or R23d, provided that when R23 is bound to a heteroatom, then R23 is R23c or R23d;
each R23a is independently F, CI, Br, I, -CN, N3 or -N02;
each R23b is independently Y 1;
each R23c is independently -R x, -N(R2x)(R2x), -SR x, -S(0)R2x, -S(0)2R x, - S(0)(OR x), -S(0)2(OR x), -OC(=Y 1)R2x, -OC(=Y21)OR2x, -OC(=Y2,)(N(R2x)(R2x)), -SC(=Y21)R2x, -SC(=Y 1)OR2x, -SC(=Y 1)(N(R2x)(R2x)), -N(R x)C(=Y2l)R2x, - N(R2x)C(=Y21)OR2x, or -N(R x)C(=Y21)(N(R2x)(R2x)) ;
each R23d is independently -C(=Y 1)R2x, -C(=Y2!)OR2x or - C(=Y21)(N(R2x)(R2x));
each R2x is independently H, (CrC8)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl; or two R2x taken together with a nitrogen to which they are both attached form a 3 to 7 membered heterocyclic ring wherein any one carbon atom of said heterocyclic ring can optionally be replaced with -0-, -S- or-NR21-; and wherein one or more of the non-terminal carbon atoms of each said (Ci-Cg)alkyl may be optionally replaced with -0-, -S- or -NR21-;
each R24 is independently (Ci-Cs)alkyl, (C2-Cg)alkenyl, or (C2-Cg)alkynyl; each R25 is independently R24 wherein each R24 is substituted with 0 to 3 " groups;
each R25a is independently (Ci-Cg)alkylene, (C2-Cs)alkenylene, or ((¾-
Cg)alkynylene any one of which said (Ci-Cg)alkylene, (C2-Cg)alkenylene, or (¾- Cg)alkynylene is substituted with 0-3 R23 groups;
each W23 is independently W24 or W25;
each W24 is independently R25, -C(=Y2,)R25, -C(=Y21)W25, -S02R25, or - S02W25;
each W25 is independently carbocycle or heterocycle wherein W25 is independently substituted with 0 to 3 R22 groups; and
each Y21 is independently O or S. Table 20.1
Figure imgf000079_0001
7 8
Figure imgf000080_0001

Figure imgf000081_0001
80
Figure imgf000082_0001
Figure imgf000083_0001
82
Figure imgf000084_0001
83
Figure imgf000085_0001
84
Figure imgf000086_0001
85
Figure imgf000087_0001
86
Figure imgf000088_0001
Figure imgf000088_0002
Table 20.20
Figure imgf000088_0003
120
Figure imgf000089_0001
88
Figure imgf000090_0001
Table 20.25
^w23 R24 R21
148 149 150 151 152 153 \ W3 _^ 3
0 r
154 155 156 157 158 159
Table 20.26
<*\ ,W23 \ 21 H \ ^ 23 N N N N f N
I I I
H H H H H H
160 161 162 163 164 165
Figure imgf000090_0002
166 167 168 169 170 171
Figure imgf000091_0001
Table 20.28
Figure imgf000092_0001
91
Figure imgf000093_0001
92
Figure imgf000094_0001
93 able 20.33
Figure imgf000095_0001
Figure imgf000095_0002
220
Figure imgf000096_0001
95
Figure imgf000097_0001
96
Figure imgf000098_0001
Embodiments of Rx include esters, carbamates, carbonates, thioesters, amides, thioami
Figure imgf000099_0001
Y and M12a
Any reference to the compounds of the invention described herein also includes a reference to a physiologically acceptable salt thereof. Examples of physiologically acceptable salts of the compounds of the invention include salts derived from an appropriate base, such as an alkali metal or an alkaline earth (for example, Na+, Li+, K+> Ca+2 and Mg+2), ammonium and R4 (wherein R is defined herein). Physiologically acceptable salts of a nitrogen atom or an amino group include (a) acid addition salts formed with inorganic acids, for example, hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, sulfamic acids, phosphoric acid, nitric acid and the like; (b) salts formed with organic acids such as, for example, acetic acid, oxalic acid, tartaric acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, citric acid, malic acid, ascorbic acid, benzoic acid, isethionic acid, lactobionic acid, tannic acid, palmitic acid, alginic acid, polyglutamic acid, naphthalenesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, naphthalenedisulfonic acid, polygalacturonic acid, malonic acid, sulfosalicylic acid, glycolic acid, 2-hydroxy-3-naphthoate, pamoate, salicylic acid, stearic acid, phthalic acid, mandelic acid, lactic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, lysine, arginine, glutamic acid, glycine, serine, threonine, alanine, isoleucine, leucine and the like; and (c) salts formed from elemental anions for example, chlorine, bromine, and iodine.
Physiologically acceptable salts of a compound of a hydroxy group include the anion of said compound in combination with a suitable cation such as Na+ and NRV*".
For therapeutic use, salts of active ingredients of the compounds of the invention will be physiologically acceptable, i.e. they will be salts derived from a physiologically acceptable acid or base. However, salts of acids or bases which are not physiologically acceptable may also find use, for example, in the preparation or purification of a physiologically acceptable compound. All salts, whether or not derived form a physiologically acceptable acid or base, are within the scope of the present invention.
Finally, it is to be understood that the compositions herein comprise compounds of the invention in their un-ionized, as well as zwitterionic form, and combinations with stoichiometric amounts of water as in hydrates.
The compounds of the invention, exemplified by Formula l-III and Formula IV- VI may have chiral centers, e.g. chiral carbon or phosphorus atoms. The compounds of the invention thus include racemic mixtures of all stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, and atropisomers. In addition, the compounds of the invention include enriched or resolved optical isomers at any or all asymmetric, chiral atoms. In other words, the chiral centers apparent from the depictions are provided as the chiral isomers or racemic mixtures. Both racemic and diastereomeric mixtures, as well as the individual optical isomers isolated or synthesized, substantially free of their enantiomeric or diastereomeric partners, are all within the scope of the invention. The racemic mixtures are separated into their individual, substantially optically pure isomers through well-known techniques such as, for example, the separation of diastereomeric salts formed with optically active adjuncts, e.g., acids or bases followed by conversion back to the optically active substances. In most instances, the desired optical isomer is synthesized by means of stereospecific reactions, beginning with the appropriate stereoisomer of the desired starting material.
The term "chiral" refers to molecules which have the property of non- superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term "achiral" refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner.
The term "stereoisomers" refers to compounds which have identical chemical constitution, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups in space.
"Diastereomer" refers to a stereoisomer with two or more centers of chirality and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another. Diastereomers have different physical properties, e.g. melting points, boiling points, spectral properties, and reactivities. Mixtures of diastereomers may separate under high resolution analytical procedures such as electrophoresis and chromatography.
"Enantiomers" refer to two stereoisomers of a compound which are non- superimposable mirror images of one another.
Stereochemical definitions and conventions used herein generally follow S. P.
Parker, Ed., McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Chemical Terms (1984) McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York; and Eliel, E. and Wilen, S., Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds (1994) John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York. Many organic compounds exist in optically active forms, i.e., they have the ability to rotate the plane of plane- polarized light. In describing an optically active compound, the prefixes D and L or R and S are used to denote the absolute configuration of the molecule about its chiral center(s). The prefixes d and 1, D and L, or (+) and (-) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with S, (-), or 1 meaning that the compound is levorotatory while a compound prefixed with R, (+), or d is dextrorotatory. For a given chemical structure, these stereoisomers are identical except that they are mirror images of one another. A specific stereoisomer may also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture. A 50:50 mixture of enantiomers is referred to as a racemic mixture or a racemate, which may occur where there has been no stereoselection or stereospecificity in a chemical reaction or process. The terms "racemic mixture" and "racemate" refer to an equimolar mixture of two enantiomeric species, devoid of optical activity.
Whenever a compound described herein is substituted with more than one of the same designated group, e.g., "R" or "R1", then it will be understood that the groups may be the same or different, i.e., each group is independently selected. Wavy lines, , indicate the site of covalent bond attachments to the adjoining substructures, groups, moieties, or atoms.
The compounds of the invention can also exist as tautomeric isomers in certain cases. Although only one delocalized resonance structure may be depicted, all such forms are contemplated within the scope of the invention. For example, ene-amine tautomers can exist for purine, pyrimidine, imidazole, guanidine, amidine, and tetrazole systems and all their possible tautomeric forms are within the scope of the invention.
One skilled in the art will recognize that the pyrrolo[l,2-fJ[l,2,4]triazine, imidazo[l,5-fJ[l,2,4]triazine, imidazo[l,2-f][l,2,4]triazine, and [l,2,4]triazolo[4,3- fj[l,2,4]triazine nucleosides can exist in tautomeric forms. For example, but not by way of limitation, structures (a) and (b) can have equivalent tautomeric forms as shown below:
Figure imgf000102_0001
a b.
All possible tautomeric forms of the heterocycles in all of the embodiments disclosed herein are within the scope of the invention.
Methods of Inhibition of HCV polymerase
Another aspect of the invention relates to methods of inhibiting the activity of HCV polymerase comprising the step of treating a sample suspected of containing HCV with a composition of the invention.
Compositions of the invention may act as inhibitors of HCV polymerase , as intermediates for such inhibitors or have other utilities as described below. The inhibitors will bind to locations on the surface or in a cavity of HCV polymerase having a geometry unique to HCV polymerase . Compositions binding HCV polymerase may bind with varying degrees of reversibility. Those compounds binding substantially irreversibly are ideal candidates for use in this method of the invention. Once labeled, the substantially irreversibly binding compositions are useful as probes for the detection of HCV polymerase . Accordingly, the invention relates to methods of detecting HCV polymerase in a sample suspected of containing HCV polymerase comprising the steps of: treating a sample suspected of containing HCV polymerase with a composition comprising a compound of the invention bound to a label; and observing the effect of the sample on the activity of the label. Suitable labels are well known in the diagnostics field and include stable free radicals, fluorophores, radioisotopes, enzymes, chemiluminescent groups and chromogens. The compounds herein are labeled in conventional fashion using functional groups such as hydroxyl, carboxyl, sulfhydryl or amino.
Within the context of the invention, samples suspected of containing HCV polymerase include natural or man-made materials such as living organisms; tissue or cell cultures; biological samples such as biological material samples (blood, serum, urine, cerebrospinal fluid, tears, sputum, saliva, tissue samples, and the like);
laboratory samples; food, water, or air samples; bioproduct samples such as extracts of cells, particularly recombinant cells synthesizing a desired glycoprotein; and the like. Typically the sample will be suspected of containing an organism which produces HCV polymerase , frequently a pathogenic organism such as HCV.
Samples can be contained in any medium including water and organic solvenfAwater mixtures. Samples include living organisms such as humans, and man made materials such as cell cultures.
The treating step of the invention comprises adding the composition of the invention to the sample or it comprises adding a precursor of the composition to the sample. The addition step comprises any method of administration as described above.
If desired, the activity of HCV polymerase after application of the composition can be observed by any method including direct and indirect methods of detecting HCV polymerase activity. Quantitative, qualitative, and semiquantitative methods of determining HCV polymerase activity are all contemplated. Typically one of the screening methods described above are applied, however, any other method such as observation of the physiological properties of a living organism are also applicable.
Organisms that contain HCV polymerase include the HCV virus. The compounds of this invention are useful in the treatment or prophylaxis of HCV infections in animals or in man.
However, in screening compounds capable of inhibiting human immunodeficiency viruses, it should be kept in mind that the results of enzyme assays may not correlate with cell culture assays. Thus, a cell based assay should be the primary screening tool.
Screens for HCV polymerase Inhibitors.
Compositions of the invention are screened for inhibitory activity against HCV polymerase by any of the conventional techniques for evaluating enzyme activity. Within the context of the invention, typically compositions are first screened for inhibition of HCV polymerase in vitro and compositions showing inhibitory activity are then screened for activity in vivo. Compositions having in vitro Ki
(inhibitory constants) of less then about 5 X 10~6 M, typically less than about 1 X 10" 7 M and preferably less than about 5 X 10"^ M are preferred for in vivo use.
Useful in vitro screens have been described in detail and will not be elaborated here. However, the examples describe suitable in vitro assays.
Pharmaceutical Formulations
The compounds of this invention are formulated with conventional carriers and excipients, which will be selected in accord with ordinary practice. Tablets will contain excipients, glidants, fillers, binders and the like. Aqueous formulations are prepared in sterile form, and when intended for delivery by other than oral administration generally will be isotonic. All formulations will optionally contain excipients such as those set forth in the "Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients" (1986). Excipients include ascorbic acid and other antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA, carbohydrates such as dextran, hydroxyalkylcellulose,
hydroxyalkylmethylcellulose, stearic acid and the like. The pH of the formulations ranges from about 3 to about 11 , but is ordinarily about 7 to 10.
While it is possible for the active ingredients to be administered alone it may be preferable to present them as pharmaceutical formulations. The formulations, both for veterinary and for human use, of the invention comprise at least one active ingredient, as above defined, together with one or more acceptable carriers therefore and optionally other therapeutic ingredients. The carrier(s) must be "acceptable" in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and physiologically innocuous to the recipient thereof.
The formulations include those suitable for the foregoing administration routes. The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Techniques and formulations generally are found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (Mack Publishing Co., Easton, PA). Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active ingredient with the carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the active ingredient with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.
Formulations of the present invention suitable for oral administration may be presented as discrete units such as capsules, cachets or tablets each containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient; as a powder or granules; as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; or as an oil-in-water liquid emulsion or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion. The active ingredient may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.
A tablet is made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder, lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, surface active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered active ingredient moistened with an inert liquid diluent. The tablets may optionally be coated or scored and optionally are formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therefrom.
For infections of the eye or other external tissues e.g. mouth and skin, the formulations are preferably applied as a topical ointment or cream containing the active ingredient(s) in an amount of, for example, 0.075 to 20% w/w (including active ingredient(s) in a range between 0.1% and 20% in increments of 0.1 % w/w such as 0.6% w/w, 0.7% w/w, etc.), preferably 0.2 to 15% w/w and most preferably 0.5 to 10% w/w. When formulated in an ointment, the active ingredients ma be employed with either a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base. Alternatively, the active ingredients maybe formulated in a cream with an oil-in-water cream base.
If desired, the aqueous phase of the cream base may include, for example, at least 30% w/w of a polyhydric alcohol, i.e. an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane 1,3-diol, mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol (including PEG 400) and mixtures thereof. The topical formulations may desirably include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the active ingredient through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of such dermal penetration enhancers include dimethyl sulphoxide and related analogs.
The oily phase of the emulsions of this invention may be constituted from known ingredients in a known manner. While the phase may comprise merely an emulsifier (otherwise known as an emulgent), it desirably comprises a mixture of at least one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil. Preferably, a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier which acts as a stabilizer. It is also preferred to include both an oil and a fat. Together, the emulsifier(s) with or without stabilizer(s) make up the so-called emulsifying wax, and the wax together with the oil and fat make up the so-called emulsifying ointment base which forms the oily dispersed phase of the cream formulations.
Emulgents and emulsion stabilizers suitable for use in the formulation of the invention include Tween® 60, Span® 80, cetostearyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl mono-stearate and sodium lauryl sulfate.
The choice of suitable oils or fats for the formulation is based on achieving the desired cosmetic properties. The cream should preferably be a non-greasy, non- staining and washable product with suitable consistency to avoid leakage from tubes or other containers. Straight or branched chain, mono- or dibasic alkyl esters such as di-isoadipate, isocetyl stearate, propylene glycol diester of coconut fatty acids, isopropyl myristate, decyl oleate, isopropyl palmitate, butyl stearate, 2-ethylhexyl palmitate or a blend of branched chain esters known as Crodamol CAP maybe used, the last three being preferred esters. These may be used alone or in combination depending on the properties required. Alternatively, high melting point lipids such as white soft paraffin and/or liquid paraffin or other mineral oils are used.
Pharmaceutical formulations according to the present invention comprise a combination according to the invention together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients and optionally other therapeutic agents.
Pharmaceutical formulations containing the active ingredient may be in any form suitable for the intended method of administration. When used for oral use for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oil suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsions, hard or soft capsules, syrups or elixirs may be prepared. Compositions intended for oral use may be prepared according to any method known to the art for the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions and such compositions may contain one or more agents including sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and preserving agents, in order to provide a palatable preparation.
Tablets containing the active ingredient in admixture with non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable excipient which are suitable for manufacture of tablets are acceptable. These excipients may be, for example, inert diluents, such as calcium or sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium or sodium phosphate; granulating and disintegrating agents, such as maize starch, or alginic acid; binding agents, such as starch, gelatin or acacia; and lubricating agents, such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc. Tablets may be uncoated or may be coated by known techniques including microencapsulation to delay disintegration and adsorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period. For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate alone or with a wax may be employed.
Formulations for oral use may be also presented as hard gelatin capsules where the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent, for example calcium phosphate or kaolin, or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium, such as peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil.
Aqueous suspensions of the invention contain the active materials in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspensions. Such excipients include a suspending agent, such as sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcelluose, sodium alginate,
polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia, and dispersing or wetting agents such as a naturally-occurring phosphatide (e.g., lecithin), a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid (e.g., polyoxyethylene stearate), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol (e.g., heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from a fatty acid and a hexitol anhydride (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate). The aqueous suspension may also contain one or more preservatives such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxy-benzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
Oil suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient in a vegetable oil, such as arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil, or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin. The oral suspensions may contain a thickening agent, such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents, such as those set forth above, and flavoring agents may be added to provide a palatable oral preparation. These compositions may be preserved by the addition of an antioxidant such as ascorbic acid.
Dispersible powders and granules of the invention suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent, and one or more preservatives. Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those disclosed above. Additional excipients, for example sweetening, flavoring and coloring agents, may also be present.
The pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may also be in the form of oil-in-water emulsions. The oily phase may be a vegetable oil, such as olive oil or arachis oil, a mineral oil, such as liquid paraffin, or a mixture of these. Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums, such as gum acacia and gum tragacanth, naturally-occurring phosphatides, such as soybean lecithin, esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides, such as sorbitan monooleate, and condensation products of these partial esters with ethylene oxide, such as polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate. The emulsion may also contain sweetening and flavoring agents. Syrups and elixirs maybe formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also contain a demulcent, a preservative, a flavoring or a coloring agent.
The pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may be in the form of a sterile injectable preparation, such as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension. This suspension may be formulated according to the known art using those suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents which have been mentioned above. The sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, such as a solution in 1 ,3-butane-diol or prepared as a lyophilized powder. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile fixed oils may conventionally be employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid may likewise be used in the preparation of injectables.
The amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host treated and the particular mode of administration. For example, a time-release formulation intended for oral administration to humans may contain approximately 1 to 1000 mg of active material compounded with an appropriate and convenient amount of carrier material which may vary from about 5 to about 95% of the total compositions (weigh weight). The pharmaceutical composition can be prepared to provide easily measurable amounts for administration. For example, an aqueous solution intended for intravenous infusion may contain from about 3 to 500 g of the active ingredient per milliliter of solution in order that infusion of a suitable volume at a rate of about 30 mL/hr can occur.
Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye also include eye drops wherein the active ingredient is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the active ingredient. The active ingredient is preferably present in such formulations in a concentration of 0.5 to 20%, advantageously 0.5 to 10%, and particularly about 1.5% w/w.
Formulations suitable for topical administration in the mouth include lozenges comprising the active ingredient in a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert basis such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active ingredient in a suitable liquid carrier.
Formulations for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with a suitable base comprising for example cocoa butter or a salicylate.
Formulations suitable for intrapulmonary or nasal administration have a particle size for example in the range of 0.1 to 500 microns, such as 0.5, 1, 30, 35 etc., which is administered by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage or by inhalation through the mouth so as to reach the alveolar sacs. Suitable formulations include aqueous or oily solutions of the active ingredient. Formulations suitable for aerosol or dry powder administration may be prepared according to conventional methods and may be delivered with other therapeutic agents such as compounds heretofore used in the treatment or prophylaxis of HCV infections as described below.
Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing in addition to the active ingredient such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and nonaqueous sterile injection solutions which may contain anti-oxidants, buffers, bacteriostats and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient; and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions which may include suspending agents and thickening agents.
The formulations are presented in unit-dose or multi-dose containers, for example sealed ampoules and vials, and may be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water for injection, immediately prior to use. Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions are prepared from sterile powders, granules and tablets of the kind previously described. Preferred unit dosage formulations are those containing a daily dose or unit daily sub-dose, as herein above recited, or an appropriate fraction thereof, of the active ingredient.
It should be understood that in addition to the ingredients particularly mentioned above the formulations of this invention may include other agents conventional in the art having regard to the type of formulation in question, for example those suitable for oral administration may include flavoring agents.
The invention further provides veterinary compositions comprising at least one active ingredient as above defined together with a veterinary carrier therefore.
Veterinary carriers are materials useful for the purpose of administering the composition and may be solid, liquid or gaseous materials which are otherwise inert or acceptable in the veterinary art and are compatible with the active ingredient. These veterinary compositions may be administered orally, parenterally or by any other desired route.
Compounds of the invention are used to provide controlled release pharmaceutical formulations containing as active ingredient one or more compounds of the invention ("controlled release formulations") in which the release of the active ingredient are controlled and regulated to allow less frequency dosing or to improve the pharmacokinetic or toxicity profile of a given active ingredient.
Effective dose of active ingredient depends at least on the nature of the condition being treated, toxicity, whether the compound is being used
prophylactically (lower doses) or against an active viral infection, the method of delivery, and the pharmaceutical formulation, and will be determined by the clinician using conventional dose escalation studies. It can be expected to be from about 0.0001 to about 100 mg/kg body weight per day; typically, from about 0.01 to about 10 mg kg body weight per day; more typically, from about .01 to about 5 mg/kg body weight per day; most typically, from about .05 to about 0.5 mg/kg body weight per day. For example, the daily candidate dose for an adult human of approximately 70 kg body weight will range from 1 mg to 1000 mg, preferably between 5 mg and 500 mg, and may take the form of single or multiple doses.
Routes of Administration
One or more compounds of the invention (herein referred to as the active ingredients) are administered by any route appropriate to the condition to be treated. Suitable routes include oral, rectal, nasal, topical (including buccal and sublingual), vaginal and parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous, intradermal, intrathecal and epidural), and the like. It will be appreciated that the preferred route may vary with for example the condition of the recipient. An advantage of the compounds of this invention is that they are orally bioavailable and can be dosed orally.
Combination Therapy
Combinations of the compounds of Formula I-III and Formula IV-VI are typically selected based on the condition to be treated, cross-reactivities of ingredients and pharmaco-properties of the combination. For example, when treating an infection (e.g., HCV), the compositions of the invention are combined with other active therapeutic agents (such as those described herein).
Compositions of the invention are also used in combination with one or more other active ingredients. Preferably, the other active therapeutic ingredients or agents are interferons, ribavirin or its analogs, HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, antagonists of the renin-angiotensin system, other anti- fibrotic agents, endothelin antagonists, nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, HCV NS5A inhibitors, TLR-7 agonists, cyclophillin inhibitors, HCV IRES inhibitors, pharmacokinetic enhancers or other drugs for treating HCV; or mixtures thereof.
More specifically, one or more compounds of the present invention may be combined with one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of
1) interferons, e.g., pegylated rIFN-alpha 2b (PEG-Intron), pegylated rlFN- alpha 2a (Pegasys), rIFN-alpha 2b (Intron A), rIFN-alpha 2a (Roferon-A), interferon alpha (MOR-22, OPC-18, Alfaferone, Alfanative, Multiferon, subalin), interferon alfacon-1 (Infergen), interferon alpha-nl (Wellferon), interferon alpha-n3 (Alferon), interferon-beta (Avonex, DL-8234), interferon-omega (omega DUROS, Biomed 510), albinterferon alpha-2b (Albuferon), IFN alpha XL, BLX-883 (Locteron), DA-3021, glycosylated interferon alpha-2b (AVI-005), PEG-Infergen, PEGylated interferon lambda (PEGylated IL-29), and belerofon,
2) ribavirin and its analogs, e.g., ribavirin (Rebetol, Copegus), and taribavirin (Viramidine),
3) HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, e.g. , boceprevir (SCH-503034 , SCH-7), telaprevir (VX-950), VX-813, TMC-435 (TMC435350), ABT-450, BI-201335, BI-
1230, MK-7009, SCH-900518, VBY-376, VX-500, GS-9256, GS-9451, BMS- 790052, BMS-605339, PHX-1766, AS-101, YH-5258, YH5530, YH5531, and ITMN-191 (R-7227), 5 4) alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors, e.g., celgosivir (MX-3253), Miglitol, and
UT-231B,
5) hepatoprotectants, e.g., emericasan (IDN-6556), ME-3738, GS-9450 (LB- 84451), silibilin, and MitoQ,
6) nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, e.g., R1626, 10 R7128 (R4048), IDX184, IDX-102, PSI-7851, BCX-4678, valopicitabine (NM-283), and MK-0608,
7) non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, e.g., filibuvir (PF- 868554), ABT-333, ABT-072, BI-207127, VCH-759, VCH-916, JTK-652, MK-3281, VBY-708, VCH-222, A848837, ANA-598, GL60667, GL59728, A-63890, A-48773,
15 A-48547, BC-2329, VCH-796 (nesbuvir), GSK625433, BILN-1941, XTL-2125, and GS-9190,
8) HCV NS5A inhibitors, e.g., AZD-2836 (A-831), AZD-7295 (A-689), and BMS-790052,
9) TLR-7 agonists, e.g., imiquimod, 852A, GS-9524, ANA-773, ANA-975, 20 AZD-8848 (DSP-3025), PF-04878691, and SM-360320,
10) cyclophillin inhibitors, e.g., DEBIO-025, SCY-635, and NIM811,
11) HCV IRES inhibitors, e.g., MCI-067,
12) pharmacokinetic enhancers, e.g., BAS-100, SPI-452, PF-4194477, TMC- 41629, GS-9350, GS-9585, and roxythromycin,
25 13) other drugs for treating HCV, e.g. , thymosin alpha 1 (Zadaxin),
nitazoxanide (Alinea, NTZ), BIVN-401 (virostat), PYN-17 (altirex), KPE02003002, actilon (CPG-10101), GS-9525, KRN-7000, civacir, GI-5005, XTL-6865, BIT225, PTX-1 11, ITX2865, TT-033i, ANA 971, NOV-205, tarvacin, EHC-18, VGX-410C, EMZ-702, AVI 4065, BMS-650032, BMS-791325, Bavitaximab, MDX-1106 (ONO-
30 4538), Oglufanide, FK-788, and VX-497 (merimepodib)
14) mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, e.g., statins, HMGCoA synthase inhibitors (e.g., hymeglusin), squalene synthesis inhibitors (e.g., zaragozic acid);
15) angiotensin II receptor antagonists, e.g., losartan, irbesartan, olmesartan, candesartan, valsartan, telmisartan, eprosartan; 16) angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors, e.g., captopril, zofenopril, enalapril, ramipril, quinapril, perindopril, lisinopril, benazepril, fosinopril;
17) other anti-fibrotic agents, e.g., amiloride and
18) endothelin antagonists, e.g. bosentan and ambrisentan.
In yet another embodiment, the present application discloses pharmaceutical compositions comprising a compound of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, in combination with at least one additional therapeutic agent, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
According to the present invention, the therapeutic agent used in combination with the compound or composition of the present invention can be any agent having a therapeutic effect when used in combination with the compound of the present invention. For example, the therapeutic agent used in combination with the compound or composition of the present invention can be interferons, ribavirin or its analogs, HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, antagonists of the renin-angiotensin system, other anti-fibrotic agents, endothelin antagonists, nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, HCV NS5A inhibitors, TLR-7 agonists, cyclophillin inhibitors, HCV IRES inhibitors, pharmacokinetic enhancers or other drugs for treating HCV; or mixtures thereof.
More specifically, compositions of one or more compounds of the present invention may be combined with one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of
1 ) interferons, e.g. , pegylated rIFN-alpha 2b (PEG-Intron), pegylated rlFN- alpha 2a (Pegasys), rIFN-alpha 2b (Intron A), rIFN-alpha 2a (Roferon-A), interferon alpha (MOR-22, OPC-18, Alfaferone, Alfanative, Multiferon, subalin), interferon alfacon-1 (Infergen), interferon alpha-nl (Wellferon), interferon alpha-n3 (Alferon), interferon-beta (Avonex, DL-8234), interferon-omega (omega DUROS, Biomed 510), albinterferon alpha-2b (Albuferon), IFN alpha XL, BLX-883 (Locteron), DA-3021, glycosylated interferon alpha-2b (AVI-005), PEG-Infergen, PEGylated interferon lambda (PEGylated IL-29), and belerofon,
2) ribavirin and its analogs, e.g., ribavirin (Rebetol, Copegus), and taribavirin (Viramidine),
3) HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, e.g., boceprevir (SCH-503034 , SCH-7), telaprevir (VX-950), VX-813, TMC-435 (TMC435350), ABT-450, BI-201335, BI-
1230, MK-7009, SCH-900518, VBY-376, VX-500, GS-9256, GS-9451, BMS- 790052, BMS-605339, PHX-1766, AS-101, YH-5258, YH5530, YH5531, and ITMN-191 (R-7227),
4) alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors, e.g., oelgosivir (MX-3253), Miglitol, and UT-231B,
5) hepatoprotectants, e.g., emericasan (IDN-6556), ME-3738, GS-9450 (LB- 84451), silibilin, and MitoQ,
6) nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, e.g., R1626, R7128 (R4048), IDX184, IDX-102, PSI-7851, BCX-4678, valopicitabine (NM-283), and MK-0608,
7) non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, e.g., filibuvir (PF- 868554), ABT-333, ABT-072, BI-207127, VCH-759, VCH-916, JTK-652, MK-3281, VBY-708, VCH-222, A848837, ANA-598, GL60667, GL59728, A-63890, A-48773, A-48547, BC-2329, VCH-796 (nesbuvir), GSK625433, BILN-1941, XTL-2125, and GS-9190,
8) HCV NS5A inhibitors, e.g., AZD-2836 (A-831), AZD-7295 (A-689), and BMS-790052,
9) TLR-7 agonists, e.g., imiquimod, 852A, GS-9524, ANA-773, ANA-975, AZD-8848 (DSP-3025), PF-04878691, and SM-360320,
10) cyclophillin inhibitors, e.g., DEBIO-025, SCY-635, and NIM811,
11) HCV IRES inhibitors, e.g., MCI-067,
12) pharmacokinetic enhancers, e.g., BAS-100, SPI-452, PF-4194477, TMC- 41629, GS-9350, GS-9585, and roxythromycin, 13) other drugs for treating HCV, e.g., thymosin alpha 1 (Zadaxin), nitazoxanide (Alinea, NTZ), BIVN-401 (virostat), PYN-17 (altirex), PE02003002, actilon (CPG-10101), GS-9525, KRN-7000, civacir, GI-5005, XTL-6865, BIT225, PTX-11 1, ITX2865, TT-033i, ANA 971, NOV-205, tarvacin, EHC-18, VGX-410C, EMZ-702, AVI 4065, BMS-650032, BMS-791325, Bavituximab, MDX-1106 (ONO- 4538), Oglufanide, FK-788, and VX-497 (merimepodib)
14) mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, e.g., statins, HMGCoA synthase inhibitors (e.g., hymeglusin), squalene synthesis inhibitors (e.g., zaragozic acid);
15) angiotensin II receptor antagonists, e.g., losartan, irbesartan, olmesartan, candesartan, valsartan, telmisartan, eprosartan;
16) angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors, e.g., captopril, zofenopril, enalapril, ramipril, quinapril, perindopril, lisinopril, benazepril, fosinopril;
17) other anti-fibrotic agents, e.g., amiloride and
18) endothelin antagonists, e.g. bosentan and ambrisentan.
In yet another embodiment, the present application provides a combination pharmaceutical agent comprising:
a) a first pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or ester thereof; and b) a second pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one additional therapeutic agent selected from the group consisting of HIV protease inhibiting compounds, HIV non-nucleoside inhibitors of reverse transcriptase, HIV nucleoside inhibitors of reverse transcriptase, HIV nucleotide inhibitors of reverse transcriptase, HIV integrase inhibitors, gp41 inhibitors, CXCR4 inhibitors, gpl20 inhibitors, CCR5 inhibitors, interferons, ribavirin analogs, NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors, cyclophilin inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV, and other drugs for treating HCV, and combinations thereof.
Combinations of the compounds of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI and additional active therapeutic agents maybe selected to treat patients infected with HCV and other conditions such as HIV infections. Accordingly, the compounds of Formula I-III and Formula IV- VI may be combined with one or more compounds useful in treating HIV, for example HIV protease inhibiting compounds, HIV non- nucleoside inhibitors of reverse transcriptase, HIV nucleoside inhibitors of reverse transcriptase, HIV nucleotide inhibitors of reverse transcriptase, HIV integrase inhibitors, gp41 inhibitors, CXCR4 inhibitors, gpl20 inhibitors, CCR5 inhibitors, interferons, ribavirin analogs, NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha- glucosidase 1 inhibitors, cyclophilin inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV, and other drugs for treating HCV.
More specifically, one or more compounds of the present invention may be combined with one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of 1) HIV protease inhibitors, e.g., amprenavir, atazanavir, fosamprenavir, indinavir, lopinavir, ritonavir, lopinavir + ritonavir, nelfmavir, saquinavir, tipranavir, brecanavir, darunavir, TMC-126, TMC-114, mozenavir (DMP-450), JE-2147 (AG1776), AG1859, DG35, L-756423, RO0334649, KNI-272, DPC-681, DPC-684, and GW640385X, DG17, PPL-100, 2) a HIV non-nucleoside inhibitor of reverse transcriptase, e.g., capravirine, emivirine, delaviridine, efavirenz, nevirapine, (+) calanolide A, etravirine, GW5634, DPC-083, DPC-961, DPC-963, MIV-150, and TMC-120, TMC-278 (rilpivirine), efavirenz, BILR 355 BS, VRX 840773, UK- 453,061, RDEA806, 3) a HIV nucleoside inhibitor of reverse transcriptase, e.g., zidovudine, emtricitabine, didanosine, stavudine, zalcitabine, lamivudine, abacavir, amdoxovir, elvucitabine, alovudine, MIV-210, raeivir (+-FTC), D-d4FC, emtricitabine, phosphazide, fozivudine tidoxil, fosalvudine tidoxil, apricitibine (AVX754), amdoxovir, KP-1461, abacavir + lamivudine, abacavir + lamivudine + zidovudine, zidovudine + lamivudine, 4) a HIV nucleotide inhibitor of reverse transcriptase, e.g., tenofovir, tenofovir disoproxil fumarate + emtricitabine, tenofovir disoproxil fumarate + emtricitabine + efavirenz, and adefovir, 5) a HIV integrase inhibitor, e.g., curcumin, derivatives of curcumin, chicoric acid, derivatives of chicoric acid, 3,5-dicaffeoylquinic acid, derivatives of 3,5-dicaffeoylquinic acid, aurintricarboxylic acid, derivatives of aurintricarboxylic acid, caffeic acid phenethyl ester, derivatives of caffeic acid phenethyl ester, tyrphostin, derivatives of tyrphostin, quercetin, derivatives of quercetin, S-1360, zintevir (AR-177), L-870812, and L- 870810, MK-0518 (raltegravir), BMS-707035, MK-2048, BA-011, BMS-538158, GSK364735C, 6) a gp41 inhibitor, e.g., enfuvirtide, sifuvirtide, FB006M, TRI-1144, SPC3, DES6, Locus gp41, CovX, and REP 9, 7) a CXCR4 inhibitor, e.g., AMD-070, 8) an entry inhibitor, e.g., SP01 A, TNX-355, 9) a gpl20 inhibitor, e.g., BMS-488043 and BlockAide/CR, 10) a G6PD and NADH-oxidase inhibitor, e.g., immunitin, 10) a CCR5 inhibitor, e.g., aplaviroc, vicriviroc, INCB9471, PRO-140, INCB15050, PF- 232798, CCR5mAb004, and maraviroc, 11) an interferon, e.g., pegylated rIFN-alpha 2b, pegylated rIFN-alpha 2a, rIFN-alpha 2b, IFN alpha-2b XL, rIFN-alpha 2a, consensus IFN alpha, infergen, rebif, locteron, AVI-005, PEG-infergen, pegylated IFN-beta, oral interferon alpha, feron, reaferon, intermax alpha, r-IFN-beta, infergen + actimmune, IFN-omega with DUROS, and albuferon, 12) ribavirin analogs, e.g., rebetol, copegus, VX-497, and viramidine (taribavirin) 13) NS5a inhibitors, e.g., A- 831, A-689 and BMS-790052, 14) NS5b polymerase inhibitors, e.g., NM-283, valopicitabine, R1626, PSI-6130 (R1656), IDX184, PSI-7851, HCV-796, BILB 1941 , MK-0608, NM-107, R7128, VCH-759, PF-868554, GSK625433, and XTL-2125, 15) NS3 protease inhibitors, e.g., SCH-503034 (SCH-7), VX-950 (Telaprevir), ITMN- 191, and BILN-2065, 16) alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors, e.g., MX-3253 (celgosivir) and UT-231B, 17) hepatoprotectants, e.g., IDN-6556, ME 3738, MitoQ, and LB- 84451, 18) non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV, e.g., benzimidazole derivatives, benzo- 1 ,2,4-thiadiazine derivatives, and phenylalanine derivatives, 19) other drags for treating HCV, e.g., zadaxin, nitazoxanide (alinea), BIVN-401 (virostat), DEBIO-025, VGX-410C, EMZ-702, AVI 4065, bavituximab, oglufanide, PYN-17, KPE02003002, actilon (CPG-10101), KRN-7000, civacir, GI-5005, ANA-975, XTL-6865, ANA 971, NOV-205, tarvacin, EHC-18, and NIM811, 19) pharmacokinetic enhancers, e.g., BAS-100 and SPI452, 20)RNAse H inhibitors, e.g., ODN-93 and ODN-112, 21) other anti-HIV agents, e.g., VGV-1, PA-457 (bevirimat), ampligen, HRG214, cytolin, polyniun, VGX-410, KD247, AMZ 0026, CYT 99007, A-221 HIV, BAY 50-4798, MDX010 (iplimumab), PBS119, ALG889, and PA-1050040. It is also possible to combine any compound of the invention with one or more other active therapeutic agents in a unitary dosage form for simultaneous or sequential administration to a patient. The combination therapy may be administered as a simultaneous or sequential regimen. When administered sequentially, the combination may be administered in two or more administrations.
Co-administration of a compound of the invention with one or more other active therapeutic agents generally refers to simultaneous or sequential administration of a compound of the invention and one or more other active therapeutic agents, such that therapeutically effective amounts of the compound of the invention and one or more other active therapeutic agents are both present in the body of the patient.
Co-administration includes administration of unit dosages of the compounds of the invention before or after administration of unit dosages of one or more other active therapeutic agents, for example, administration of the compounds of the invention within seconds, minutes, or hours of the administration of one or more other active therapeutic agents. For example, a unit dose of a compound of the invention can be administered first, followed within seconds or minutes by administration of a unit dose of one or more other active therapeutic agents. Alternatively, a unit dose of one or more other therapeutic agents can be administered first, followed by administration of a unit dose of a compound of the invention within seconds or minutes. In some cases, it may be desirable to administer a unit dose of a compound of the invention first, followed, after a period of hours (e.g., 1-12 hours), by administration of a unit dose of one or more other active therapeutic agents. In other cases, it may be desirable to administer a unit dose of one or more other active therapeutic agents first, followed, after a period of hours (e.g., 1-12 hours), by administration of a unit dose of a compound of the invention.
The combination therapy may provide "synergy" and "synergistic", i.e. the effect achieved when the active ingredients used together is greater than the sum of the effects that results from using the compounds separately. A synergistic effect may be attained when the active ingredients are: (1) co-formulated and administered or delivered simultaneously in a combined formulation; (2) delivered by alternation or in parallel as separate formulations; or (3) by some other regimen. When delivered in alternation therapy, a synergistic effect may be attained when the compounds are administered or delivered sequentially, e.g. in separate tablets, pills or capsules, or by different injections in separate syringes. In general, during alternation therapy, an effective dosage of each active ingredient is administered sequentially, i.e. serially, whereas in combination therapy, effective dosages of two or more active ingredients are administered together. A synergistic anti-viral effect denotes an antiviral effect which is greater than the predicted purely additive effects of the individual compounds of the combination.
In still yet another embodiment, the present application provides for methods of inhibiting HCV polymerase in a cell, comprising: contacting a cell infected with HCV with an effective amount of a compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV-VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, whereby HCV polymerase is inhibited.
In still yet another embodiment, the present application provides for methods of inhibiting HCV polymerase in a cell, comprising: contacting a cell infected with
HCV with an effective amount of a compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV-VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, and at least one additional active therapeutic agent, whereby HCV polymerase is inhibited.
In still yet another embodiment, the present application provides for methods of inhibiting HCV polymerase in a cell, comprising: contacting a cell infected with
HCV with an effective amount of a compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV-VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, and at least one additional active therapeutic agent selected from the group consisting of one or more interferons, ribavirin or its analogs, HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, antagonists of the renin-angiotensin system, other anti-fibrotic agents, endothelin antagonists, nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, HCV NS5A inhibitors, TLR-7 agonists, cyclophillin inhibitors, HCV IRES inhibitors, pharmacokinetic enhancers and other drugs for treating HCV; or mixtures thereof.
In still yet another embodiment, the present application provides for methods of treating HCV in a patient, comprising: administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I- III and Formula IV-VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof.
In still yet another embodiment, the present application provides for methods of treating HCV in a patient, comprising: administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I- III and Formula IV-VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, and at least one additional active therapeutic agent, whereby HCV polymerase is inhibited.
In still yet another embodiment, the present application provides for methods of treating HCV in a patient, comprising: administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I-III and Formula IV-VI, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, and at least one additional active therapeutic agent selected from the group consisting of one or more interferons, ribavirin or its analogs, HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha-glucosidase 1 inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, antagonists of the renin-angiotensin system, other anti-fibrotic agents, endothelin antagonists, nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5FJ polymerase, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, HCV NS5A inhibitors, TLR-7 agonists, cyclophillin inhibitors, HCV IRES inhibitors, pharmacokinetic enhancers and other drugs for treating HCV; or mixtures thereof.
In still yet another embodiment, the present application provides for the use of a compound of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, and/or ester thereof, for the preparation of a medicament for treating an HCV infection in a patient.
Metabolites of the Compounds of the Invention
Also falling within the scope of this invention are the in vivo metabolic products of the compounds described herein, to the extent such products are novel and unobvious over the prior art. Such products may result for example from the oxidation, reduction, hydrolysis, amidation, esterifi cation and the like of the administered compound, primarily due to enzymatic processes. Accordingly, the invention includes novel and unobvious compounds produced by a process comprising contacting a compound of this invention with a mammal for a period of time sufficient to yield a metabolic product thereof. Such products typically are identified by preparing a radiolabeled (e.g. or -Ή) compound of the invention, administering it parenterally in a detectable dose (e.g. greater than about 0.5 mg/kg) to an animal such as rat, mouse, guinea pig, monkey, or to man, allowing sufficient time for metabolism to occur (typically about 30 seconds to 30 hours) and isolating its conversion products from the urine, blood or other biological samples. These products are easily isolated since they are labeled (others are isolated by the use of antibodies capable of binding epitopes surviving in the metabolite). The metabolite structures are determined in conventional fashion, e.g. by MS or NMR analysis. In general, analysis of metabolites is done in the same way as conventional drug metabolism studies well-known to those skilled in the art. The conversion products, so long as they are not otherwise found in vivo, are useful in diagnostic assays for therapeutic dosing of the compounds of the invention even if they possess no HCV polymerase inhibitory activity of their own.
Recipes and methods for determining stability of compounds in surrogate gastrointestinal secretions are known. Compounds are defined herein as stable in the gastrointestinal tract where less than about 50 mole percent of the protected groups are deprotected in surrogate intestinal or gastric juice upon incubation for 1 hour at 37°C. Simply because the compounds are stable to the gastrointestinal tract does not mean that they cannot be hydrolyzed in vivo. The prodrugs of the invention typically will be stable in the digestive system but may be substantially hydrolyzed to the parental drug in the digestive lumen, liver or other metabolic organ, or within cells in general.
Examples Certain abbreviations and acronyms are used in describing the experimental details. Although most of these would be understood by one skilled in the art, Table 1 contains a list of many of these abbreviations and acronyms.
Table 1. List of abbreviations and acronyms.
Figure imgf000124_0001
Figure imgf000125_0001
Turbo Grignard 1 :1 mixture of isopropylmagnesium chloride and lithium chloride δ parts per million down field from tetramethylsilane
Preparation of Compounds
Compound 1
Figure imgf000126_0001
1a 1b
10 To a suspension of 7-bromo-2,4-bis-methylsulfanyl-imidazo[2,l- fj[l,2,4]triazine (prepared according to WO2008116064, 500 mg, 1.72 mmol) in anhydrous THF (5 mL) was dropwise added BuLi (1.6 M in hexanes, 1.61 mL, 2.41 mmol) at -78°C. The suspension became red brown solution after 5 min, and then a mixture of la (prepared according to WO 200631725, 675 mg, 1.81 mmoi) and boron
15 trifluoride etherate (2.40 mL, 1.89 mmol) in THF (5 mL) was added dropwise to the mixture. After stirring for 2 h at -78CC, saturated NH4CI was added to quench the reaction. The mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate; the organic layer was washed with brine and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (EtOAc / hexanes), affording lb as a rich yellow foam (650 mg,
20 67%). Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3): δ 8.13 (d, 2H), 8.03 (d, 2H), 7.81 (d, 1H), 7.59 (t, 1H), 7.45 (m, 3H), 7.36 (t, 2H), 6.40 (brs, 1H), 6.01 (dd, 1H), 4.78 (m, 2H), 4.60 (dd, 1H), 2.68 (s, 3H), 2.45 (s, 3H), 1.62 (d, 3H). I9F NMR (376 MHz, CDC13): δ - 167.5. MS = 585.1 (M + H+).
Figure imgf000127_0001
1b 1c
To a solution of lb (820 mg, 1.40 mmol) in dichloromethane (20 mL) were added boron trifluoride etherate (2 mL) and tnethylsilane (2 mL), and stirred at room temperature for 16 h. Additional boron trifluoride etherate (1 mL) and triethylsilane (1 mL) were added, and stirred for 7 d. The mixture was diluted with dichloromethane and saturated sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was washed sequentially with water, saturated ammonium chloride and brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (EtOAc / hexanes), affording lc (605 mg, 76%). Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDClj): δ 8.10 (d, J= 7.2Hz, 2H), 8.00 (d, J= 7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.66 (s, 1H), 7.61 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.46 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.38 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2H), 5.78 (m, 2H), 4.80 (dd, 1H), 4.68 (m, 1H), 4.60 (dd, 1H), 2.68 (s, 3H), 2.65 (s, 3H), 1.32 (d, 3H). 19F NMR (376 MHz, CDC13): δ -149.9. MS = 569.1 (M + H+).
Figure imgf000127_0002
Compound lc (635 mg, 1.12 mmol) was placed in a steel bomb reactor. Liquid ammonia (~30 mL) was charged and the bomb reactor was tightly sealed. The mixture was stirred at 50°C for 16 h. After cooling to room temperature, ammonia was evaporated and the solid residue was dissolved in THF (10 mL) and MeOH (10 mL). Sodium ethoxide (25% wt. 0.63 mL) was added and stirred at 60°C for 40 min. The mixture was neutralized with AcOH and concentrated. The residue was purified by RP HPLC, affording the product Id (175 mg, 48%). Ή NMR (400 MHz, DMSO- d6): δ 8.21 (brs, 2H), 7.60 (s, IH), 5.45 (brs, IH), 5.43 (d, IH), 4.91 (t, IH), 3.92 (m, IH), 3.76 (m, 2H), 3.57 (m, IH), 2.44 (s, 3H), 1.09 (d, 3H). 19F NMR (376 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ -153.5. MS = 330.1 (M + H+).
Figure imgf000128_0001
To a solution of Id (175 mg, 0.53 mmol) in dichloromethane (11 mL) was added MCPBA (370 mg, ~ 1.5 mmol) and stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The mixture was concentrated, affording crude le which was used for the next reaction without purification. MS = 362.0 (M + H+).
Figure imgf000128_0002
1e
Compound le (obtained from the previous reaction) was placed in a steel bomb reactor. Liquid ammonia (-30 mL) was charged, and the bomb reactor was tightly sealed. The mixture was stirred at 115°C for 3 d. After cooling to room temperature, ammonia was evaporated. The solid residue was purified by RP HPLC, affording compound 1 (105 mg, 66% in two steps). Ή NMR (400 MHz, D20): δ 7.31 (s, IH), 5.43 (d, J = 25.2 Hz, IH), 4.07 (dd, J= 9.6, 23.2, IH), 3.89 (m, IH), 3.83 (dd, J= 2.4, 12.8 Hz, 1H), 3.67 (dd, J= 4.8, 12.8 Hz, 1H), 1.05 (d, J
NMR (376 MHz, D20): δ -153.5. MS = 299.2 (M + H+).
Compound 2
Figure imgf000129_0001
To a solution of compound 1 (82 mg, 0.28 mmol) in water (340 mL) was added adenosine deaminase (A5168 bovine spleen type IX from Sigma- Aldrich, 0.125 Unit per mL of water) and stirred at 37°C for 4 h. The mixture was concentrated and purified by RP HPLC, affording compound 2 (56 mg, 68%). Ή NMR (400 MHz, D20): δ 7.35 (s, 1H), 5.46 (d, J = 25.2 Hz, 1H), 4.08 (dd, J= 9.6, 22.6, 1H), 3.93 (m, 1H), 3.87 (dd, J = 2.4, 12.8 Hz, 1H), 3.71 (dd, .7= 4.8, 12.8 Hz, 1H), 1.12 (d, J= 23.2 Hz, 3H). 19F NMR (376 MHz, D20): δ -153.4. MS = 300.2 (M + H+).
Compound 3
Figure imgf000129_0002
1a 3b
To a suspension of 7-bromo-pyrrolo[2,l-fJ[l,2,4]triazin-4-ylamine (prepared according to WO2007056170, 2.13 g, 10 mmol) in THF (20 mL) was added TMSC1 (2.66 mL, 21 mmol) and stirred at room temperature for 16 h under argon. After cooling to -78°C, a solution of BuLi (1.6 M, 21 mL, 33 mmol) in hexanes was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 1 h at the same temperature. A solution of la (prepared according to WO 200631725, 4.46 g, 12 mmol) in THF (10 mL) was then added. After stirring for 2 h at -78°C, saturated ammonium chloride was added to quench the reaction. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic extract was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes), affording 3b as a yellow solid (1.6 g, 32%). MS = 507.1 (M + H+).
Alternative procedure for Compound 3b using 1,2-bis- [(chlorodimethyI)silanyl] ethane instead of chlorotrimethylsilane
To a suspension of 7-bromo-pyrrolo[2,l-f][l,2,4]triazin-4-ylamine (500 mg, 2.35 mmol) in THF (6.5 mL) was added BuLi (1.6 M in hexanes, 1.6 mL) at -78°C. After 30 min., a solution of l,2-bis-[(chlorodimethyl)silanyl]ethane (538 mg, 2.4 mmol) in THF (1.2 mL) was added. After 45 min., BuLi (1.6 mL) was added. After an additional 30 min., BuLi (1.5 mL) was added. After 30 min., a solution of la (610 mg, 1.64 mmol) in THF (2 mL) was then added dropwise. The resulting mixture was stirred at -78°C for 2 h under argon. Acetic acid (0.7 mL) was added dropwise to quench the reaction, followed by addition of saturated ammonium chloride. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic extract was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes), affording 3b (320 mg, 40%). The starting la was also recovered (350 mg) from the chromatography.
Figure imgf000130_0001
To a solution of compound 3b (50 mg, 0.1 mmol) and TMSCN (67 uL, 0.5 mmol) in acetonitrile (2.0 mL) at 0°C was added TMSOTf (91 uL, 0.5 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h, then at 65°C for 3 d. The reaction was quenched with saturated NaHCC>3 at room temperature, and diluted with CH3CC½Et. The organic phase was separated, washed with brine, dried over N jS04, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by RP-HPLC (acetonitrile / water), to give the desired compound 3c (28 mg, 54%). MS = 516.1 (M + H+).
Figure imgf000131_0001
3c 3
To a solution of 3c (56 mg, 0.11 mmol) in methanol (1.2 mL) was added ammonium hydroxide (28% in water, 0.8 mL) and stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified by RP HPLC (water / acetonitrile), affording compound 3 (20 mg, 60%). Ή NMR (500 MHz, D20): δ 7.88 (s, IH), 7.07 (d, IH), 6.92 (d, IH), 4.17 (m, 2H), 4.04 (dd, IH), 3.87 (dd, IH), 1.15 (d, 3H). MS = 308.1 (M + H+).
Compound 4
Figure imgf000131_0002
To a solution of compound 3b (60 mg, 0.12 mmol) in methanol (0.5 mL) was added ammonium hydroxide (28% in water, 0.5 mL) and stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified by RP HPLC (water / acetonitrile), affording compound 4 (25 mg, 70%). MS = 299.1 (M + H+).
Comp
Figure imgf000132_0001
Compound 3b was converted to compound 5a by a procedure similar to conversion of lb to lc. Compound 5a was then converted to compound 5 by a procedure similar to conversion of 3c to 3. Ή NMR (300 MHz, D20): δ 7.68 (s, 1H), 6.75 (d, J= 4.5 Hz, 1H), 6.65 (d, J = 4.5 Hz, 1H), 5.65 (d, J= 25.2 Hz, 1H), 3.95 (m, 3H), 3.74 (dd, 1H), 0.98 (d, J= 22.8 Hz, 3H). 19F NMR (282 MHz, D20): δ - 154.2. MS = 283.2 (M + H+).
General procedure for preparation of a nucleoside triphosphate: To a pear-shaped flask (5-15 mL) is charged with a nucleoside (~20 mg).
Trimethyl phosphate (0.5-1.0 mL) is added. The solution is cooled with ice-water bath. POCl3 (40-45 mg) is added and stirred at 0°C until the reaction is complete (1 to 4 h; the reaction progress is monitored by ion-exchange HPLC; analytical samples are prepared by taking ~3 of the reaction mixture and diluting it with 1.0 M Et3NH2C03 (30-50 μί)). A solution of pyrophosphate-Bu3N (250 mg) and Bu3N (90- 105 mg) in acetonitrile or D F (1-1.5 mL) is then added. The mixture is stirred at 0°C for 0.3 to 2.5 h, and then the reaction is quenched with 1.0 M Et3NH2C03 (~5 mL). The resulting mixture is stirred for additional 0.5-1 h while warming up to room temperature. The mixture is concentrated to dryness, re-dissolved in water (4 mL), and purified by ion exchange HPLC. The fractions containing the desired product is concentrated to dryness, dissolved in water (~5 mL), concentrated to dryness, and again dissolved in water (~5 mL). NaHC03 (30-50 mg) is added and concentrated to dryness. The residue is dissolved in water and concentrated to dryness again. This process is repeated 2-5 times. The residue is then subjected to C-18 HPLC purification, affording the desired product as a sodium or salt. Alternatively, the crude reaction mixture is subjected to C-18 HPLC first and then ion exchange HPLC purification to afford the desired product as a triethylammonium salt.
Compound TP-1
Figure imgf000133_0001
Compound TP-1 was prepared by the general method using Compound 2 as starting material. Ή NMR (300 MHz, D20): 5 7.44 (s, 1H), 5.45 (d, J = 25.5 Hz, 1H), 4.0-4.4 (m, 4H), 3.05 (m, NCH2CH3), 1.10 (m, NC¾CH3 and 2'-C-CH3). ,P NMR (121.4 MHz, D20): δ -9.5 (d, J= 22.1 Hz), -1 1.0 (d, J= 19.9 Hz), -23.2 (t, J = 23.0 Hz). I9F NMR (282 MHz, D20): δ -153.9.
Compound TP-2
Figure imgf000134_0001
TP-2
Compound TP-2 was prepared by the general method using Compound 3 as starting material. Ή NMR (300 MHz, D20): δ 7.82 (s, IH), 7.03 (d, IH), 6.90 (d, IH), 4.1-4.4 (m, 4H), 3.05 (m, NCH2CH3), 1.10 (m, NC¾CH3 and 2'-C-CH3). 31P NMR (121.4 MHz, D20): δ -10.7 (d, J= 19.5 Hz), -11.3 (d, J= 19.8 Hz), -23.1 (t, J = 19.8 Hz).
Compound TP-3
Figure imgf000134_0002
TP-3 Compound TP-3 was prepared by the general method using Compound 5 as starting material. Ή NMR (300 MHz, D20): δ 7.73 (s, IH), 6.87 (d, IH), 6.82 (d, IH), 5.71 (d, J= 24.6 Hz, IH), 4.0-4.4 (m, 4H), 3.05 (m, NCH2CH3), 1.14 (m, NCH2CH3), 1.00 (d, J = 22.8 Hz, 3H, 2'-C-CH3). 31P NMR (121.4 MHz, D20): δ -8.1 (d, J= 22.1 Hz), -1 1.1 (d, J= 19.9 Hz), -22.7 (t, = 23.0 Hz). 19F NMR (282 MHz, D20): δ -155.6. MS = 520.9 (M - H+). Compound TP-8a
Figure imgf000135_0001
TP-8a
Compound TP-8a was prepared by the general method using Compound 8 as starting material. Ή NMR (300 MHz, D20): δ 7.95 (s, IH), 7.68 (s, IH), 5.63 (d, J = 25.5 Hz, IH), 4.0-4.4 (m, 4H), 3.05 (m, NCH2CH3), 1.10 (m, NC¾CH3 and T-C- CH3). 31P NMR (121.4 MHz, D20): δ -9.20 (d, J= 22.1 Hz), -11.07 (d, J= 19.9 Hz), - 23.82 (t, J= 23.0 Hz). 19F NMR (282 MHz, D20): δ -155.9. MS = 521.6 (M - H+).
General procedure for preparation of a nucleoside prodrug (Method A):
Figure imgf000135_0002
A
To a solution of a nucleoside (0.1 mmol) in trimethylphosphite (1.0 mL) are added iii-tetrazole (42 mg, 0.6 mmol) followed by addition of 2,2-dimethyl- thiopropionic acid S-(2- {diisopropylamino-[2-(2,2-dimethyl-propionylsulfanyI)- ethoxy]-phosphanyloxy}-ethyl) ester (prepared according to J. Med. Chem., 1985, 38, 3941, 90 mg, 0.2 mmol) at 0°C. After stirring for 2 h, 30% hydrogen peroxide in H20 (140 μϋ) was added to the mixture. The mixture was then allowed to warm up to room temperature. After 30 min stirring, 1 M Na2S2 ¼ in ¾0 (5 mL) was added to quench the reaction. The organic layer was washed with saturated aqueous NajCOs (10 mL x 2), brine, concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by RP-HPLC (MeCN-FkO gradient) to afford a prodrug A.
Compound A-1
Figure imgf000136_0001
A-1
Compound A-1 was prepared by Method A using compound 1 as starting material. Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDC13): δ 7.42 (s, 1H), 5.47 (d, J= 26.4 Hz, 1H), 4.95 (brs, 2H), 4.59 (m, 2H), 4.35 (m, 1H, 4'-H), 4.18 (m, 2H, 5'-H), 4.10 (m, 4H), 3.13 (m, 4H), 1.24 (d, 3H), 1.22 (s, 9H), 1.19 (d, 9H). 31P NMR (161.9 MHz, CDCI3): δ - 1.26. MS = 667.1 (M + H+).
General procedure for preparation of a nucleoside prodrug (Method B):
Non-limiting examples of mono-phosphoramidate prodrugs comprising the instant invention may be prepared according to general Scheme 1.
Scheme 1
Figure imgf000137_0001
19d B
The general procedure comprises the reaction of an amino acid ester salt 19b, e.g., HCl salt, with an aryl dichlorophosphate 19a in the presence of about two to ten equivalents of a suitable base to give the phosphoramidate 19c. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, imidazoles, pyridines such as lutidine and DMAP, tertiary amines such as triethylamine and DABCO, and substituted amidines such as DBN and DBU. Tertiary amines are particularly preferred. Preferably, the product of each step is used directly in the subsequent steps without recrystallization or chromatography. Specific, but non-limiting, examples of 19a, 19b, and 19c can be found in WO 2006/121820 that is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. A nucleoside base 19d reacts with the phosphoramidate 19c in the presence of a suitable base. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, imidazoles, pyridines such as lutidine and DMAP, tertiary amines such as triethylamine and DABCO, and substituted amidines such as DBN and DBU. The product B may be isolated by recrystallization and/or chromatography.
Compound B-l
Figure imgf000138_0001
B-1
Phenyl ethoxyalaninyl phosphorochloridate (124 mg, 0.42 mmol; prepared according to McGuigan et al, J. Med. Chem. 1993, 36, 1048-1052) was added to a mixture of Compound 3 (20 mg, 0.065 mmol) and JV-methylimidazole (42 ί, 0.52 mmol) in anhydrous trimethyl phosphate (0.8 mL). The reaction mixture is stirred for 3 h at room temperature, and then methanol was added to quench the reaction. The methanol solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by reverse-phase HPLC and then by silica gel column chromatography (100% ethyl acetate), affording compound B-1 (10 mg, 27%). 31P NMR (121.4 MHz, CDC13): δ - 3.42, 3.77. MS = 563.0 (M + H+), 561.0 (M - H+).
Compound B-2
Figure imgf000138_0002
B-2
About 3.1 mmol of 4-chlorophenyl 2-propyloxyalaninyl phosphorochloridate (prepared according to McGuigan et al, J. Med. Chem. 1993, 36, 1048-1052) is added to a mixture of about 0.5 mmol of Compound 3 and about 3.8 mmol of N- methylimidazole in about 3 mL anhydrous trimethyl phosphate. The reaction mixture is stirred for about one hour to 24 hours at room temperature and methanol is added to 5 quench the reaction. The methanol solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by reverse-phase HPLC to give compound B-2.
Compound B-3
Figure imgf000139_0001
10 B-3
Compound B-3 was obtained by a similar procedure used for compound B-1. 31P NM (121.4 MHz, CDC13): δ -3.50, 3.76. MS = 577.2 (M + H+).
15 Compound B-4
Figure imgf000139_0002
B-4
Compound B-4 was obtained by a similar procedure used for compound B-1. 20 31P NMR (162 MHz, CD3OD): δ 2.2. MS = 633.4 (M + H+).
Compound B-5
Figure imgf000139_0003
B-5
Compound B-5 was obtained by a similar procedure used for compound B-1. 31P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13): δ 4.15, 4.27. MS = 549.3 (M + H+).
Compound B-6
Figure imgf000140_0001
B-6
Compound B-6 was obtained by a similar procedure used for compound B-1. 'P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13): δ 3.50, 4.07. MS = 613.1 (M + H+).
Compound B-7
Figure imgf000140_0002
B-7
Compound B-7 was obtained by a similar procedure used for compound B-1, using compound 5 as parent nucleoside. 31P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13): δ 3.37, 3.97. MS = 538.1 (M + H+).
Compound B-8
Figure imgf000141_0001
Compound B-8 was obtained by a similar procedure used for compound B-l, using compound 5 as parent nucleoside. 31P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13): δ 3.69, 4.39. MS = 588.1 (M + H+).
Alternative procedure for preparation of a nucleoside prodrug (Method C):
Figure imgf000141_0002
C-la
Into a flask containing ethyl Z-valine hydrochloride (2.5 g, 13.8 mmoL, 1 equiv.) was added CH2C12 (46 mL, 0.3 M) and phenyl dichlorophosphate (2.1 mL, 13.8 mmoL, 1 equiv.) before being cooled to -10°C. After 10 minutes, TEA (3.8 mL, 13.8 mmoL, 1 equiv) was added slowly to the reaction mixture over five minutes. The reaction was allowed to proceed for an hour before p-nitrophenol (1.9 g, 13.8 mmoL, 1 equiv.) was added to the reaction mixture followed by addition of more TEA (3.8 mL, 13.8 mmoL, 1 equiv.) over five minutes. The reaction was allowed to warm up and proceed for another two hours. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo and taken up in diethyl ether (200 mL). The insoluble salts were filtered off and the filtrate concentrated in vacuo. Flash column chromatography was carried out using 4/1 Hex / EtOAc to furnish a clear oil as C-la.
Ή NM (400 MHz, CDCb): d 8.21 (s, 2 H), 7.41 - 7.20 (m, 7 H), 4.22 -4.05 (m, 3 H), 2.46 (s, 2 H), 1.99 (dd, .7= 23.0, 20.1 Hz, 2 H), 1.68 (s, 1 H), 1.20 -1.05 (m, 8 H). 31P NMR (162 MHz, CDCI3): d -2.79 (dd, J= 28.0, 4.2 Hz).
LC MS m/z 422.99 [M + H+],
Compound C-1
Figure imgf000142_0001
Into a flask containing compound 3 (70 mg, 0.23 mmoL, 1 equiv.) was added THF (1 mL, 0.2 M) and NMP (1 mL, 0.2 M) before cooling to 0°C. i-BuMgCl (560
Figure imgf000142_0002
2.5 equiv., 1M THF) was added slowly and allowed to stir for 5 minutes before the above phenolate C-la (207 mg, 0.46 mmoL, 2 equiv. dissolved in 500 of THF) was added. The reaction mixture was warmed to 50°C. The reaction was monitored by LCMS. Once the reaction was complete, the mixture was then concentrated in vacuo, and the residue was purified by HPLC, affording Compound C-1.
Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) d 7.87 (s, 1 H), 7.24 - 7.10 (m, 4 H), 7.03 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 1H), 6.81 (d, /= 4.6 Hz, 1 H), 6.52 (d, J= 4.7 Hz, 1 H), 5.61 (s, 2H), 4.46 (dd, J = 24.0, 11.4 Hz, 2 H), 4.33 - 4.14 (m, 2 H), 4.06 (dt, J= 7.2, 4.2 Hz, 2 H), 3.82 - 3.70 (m, 1 H), 3.63 (t, J= 10.6 Hz, 2 H), 1.98 (s, 1 H), 1.17 (dd, J= 14.8, 7.6 Hz, 3 H), 0.82 (dd, J = 22.8, 6.8 Hz, 6 H). P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13): d 5.1 1.
'Τ NMR (376 MHz, CDC13): d -152.28.
LC MS m/z 591.21 [M + H+].
Figure imgf000143_0001
C-2a
Compound C-2a was obtained in a procedure similar to that exemplified for Compound C-la but using the methionine ester.
Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) d 8.19 (s, 2 H), 7.44 - 7.03 (m, 7 H), 4.11 (s, 2 H), 3.81 (d, J= 44.5 Hz, 1H), 2.04 (s, 3 H), 1.61 (s, 2 H), 1.21 (d, J = 6.1 Hz, 2 H), 1.01 - 0.65 (m, 4 H).
31 P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13) d -2.00 (d, J= 12.9 Hz).
LC MS m/z 455.03 [M + H+].
Compound C-2
Figure imgf000143_0002
Compound C-2 was obtained in a procedure similar to that exemplified for Compound C-l using Compound 3 and C-2a. 5 'Η NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) d 7.96 (d, J= 15.8 Hz, 1H), 7.40 - 7.06 (m, 13H), 6.93 (d, .7= 6.7 Hz, 1H), 6.70 (s, 1H), 5.98 (s, 1H), 4.54 (dd, J= 21.6, 11.7 Hz, 2H), 4.32 (d, J= 12.0 Hz, 2H), 4.14 (dt, J= 13.0, 6.4 Hz, 4H), 2.44 (d, J= 7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.00 (d, J= 16.2 Hz, 5H), 1.89 (s, 2H), 1.35 - 1.13 (m, 7H).
31P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13) d 4.12, 3.58.
10 19F NMR (376 MHz, CDClj) d -152.28 (s).
LC MS m/z 623.27 [M + H+].
Figure imgf000144_0001
C-3a
15 Compound C-3a was obtained in a procedure similar to that exemplified for
Compound C-la but using a tryptophan ester.
Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) d 8.18 - 8.03 (m, 3 H), 7.29 - 7.08 (m, 8 H), 7.36 - 6.98 (m, 3 H), 4.41 - 4.11 (m, 1 H), 4.15 - 3.95 (m 2 H), 3.68 - 3.80 (m, 1 H), 3.33 - 3.04 (m, 2 H), 1.06 -1.17 (m, 3 H).
20 31P NMR (162 MHz, CDCI3) d -2.87, -2.99.
LC MS m/z 510.03 [M + H+],
Compound C-3
Figure imgf000145_0001
C-3
Compound C-3 was obtained in a procedure similar to that exemplified for Compound C-l using Compound 3 and C-3a.
Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) d 8.27 (s, IH), 7.84 (s, IH), 7.47 (s, IH), 7.36 - 6.77 (m, 11 H), 6.57 (s, 1 H), 4.40 - 3.96 (m, 6 H), 3.20 (s, 4 H), 2.60 (s, IH), 1.30 - 1.04 (m, 6 H).
31P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13) d 4.02, 3.75
19F NMR (376 MHz, CDC13) d -152.13.
LC MS m/z 678.32 [M + H+].
Figure imgf000145_0002
C-4a
Compound C-4a was obtained in a procedure similar to that exemplified for Compound C-la by substituting the phenylalanine ester.
Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDClj) d 8.15 (t, J= 8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.43 - 7.11 (m, 10 H), 7.04 (ddd, 7= 11.4, 6.7, 2.9 Hz, 2 H), 4.32 (ddd, J = 15.3, 1 1.3, 6.1 Hz, 4 H), 4.15 - 3.99 (m, 7 H), 3.74 (td, J= 11.0, 5.0 Hz, 8 H), 3.01 (d, J= 5.7 Hz, 2 H), 1.17 (td, J= 7.1, 5.2 Hz, 2 H). 31P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13) d -2.97, -2.99.
LC MS m/z 471.03 [M + H+].
Compound C-4
Figure imgf000146_0001
C-4
Compound C-4 was obtained in a procedure similar to that exemplified for Compound C-1 using Compound 3 and C-4a.
¾ NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) d 7.92 (d, J= 13.2 Hz, 1H), 7.46 - 6.97 (m, 17H), 6.91 (s, 1H), 6.75 (s, 1H), 4.10 (dd, J = 29.6, 19.2 Hz, 8H), 2.97 (s, 3H), 1.32 - 1.05 (m, 7H).
31P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13) d 5.11.
"F NMR (376 MHz, CDCI3) d -152.34 (s).
LC MS m/z 639.24 [M + H+].
Figure imgf000146_0002
C-5a
Compound C-5a was obtained in a procedure similar to that exemplified for Compound C-la but using the proline ester. ¾ NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) d 8.20 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 2 H), 7.45 - 7.08 (m, 7 H), 4.37 (td, J= 8.0, 3.8 Hz, 2 H), 4.17 - 3.98 (m, 2 H), 3.61 - 3.34 (m, 2 H), 2.21 - 1.77 (m, 3 H), 1.19 (td, = 7.1, 3.8 Hz, 3 H).
31P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13) d -3.92, -3.96.
LC MS m/z 420.98 [M + H+].
Compound C-5
Figure imgf000147_0001
C-5
Compound C-5 was obtained in a procedure similar to that exemplified for
Compound C-1 using Compound 3 and C-5a.
¾ NMR (400 MHz, CDCI3) d 7.95 (d, J= 4.5 Hz, 1 H), 7.39 - 7.10 (m, 4 H), 6.92 (dd, J= 16.0, 4.6 Hz, 1 H), 6.69 (s, 1H), 6.03 (bs, 2 H), 4.46 - 4.36 (m, 1 H), 4.36 - 3.96 (m, 4 H), 3.37 (d, J = 58.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.26 - 1.66 (m, 4 H), 1.39 - 1.12 (m, 8 H). 3,P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13) d 3.47, 2.75.
19F NMR (376 MHz, CDC13) d -152.36.
LC MS m/z 589.14 [M + H+].
Figure imgf000148_0001
Compound C-6
Compound C-6 was obtained in a procedure similar to that exemplified for Compound C-1 using Compound 3 and the sulphone analog of C-la.
Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) d 7.93 (s, 1 H), 7.89 (s, 1 H), 7.35 - 7.01 (m, 5 H), 6.93 (d, J= 2.8 Hz„ 1 H), 6.58 (d, J = 2.8 Hz, 1H), 5.79 (bs, 2 H), 4.30 (s, 6 H), 4.11 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 6H), 3.10 - 2.84 (m, 3 H), 2.75 (s, 3 H), 2.54 (s, 6 H), 1.31 -1.15 (m, 6 H). 3,P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13) d 3.39, 3.33.
19F NMR (376 MHz, CDC13) d -152.40
LC MS m/z 655.24 [M + H+].
Compound PD-A-8b
Figure imgf000149_0001
PD-A-8b
To a solution of Compound 8 (200 mg, 0.71 mmol) in THF (1 mL) and NMP (1 mL) under an atmosphere of argon at 0°C was added tert-butyl magnesium chloride (1.0 M in THF, 1.06mL, 1.06 mmol). After 15 minutes, compound 30d-l (280 mg, 0.71 mmol) was added as a solution in THF. After 5 minutes, the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and was stirred for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled to 0°C, quenched with MeOH, and concentrated. The reaction was purified by silica gel chromatography and then RP HPLC, affording PD-A-8b (225 mg, 59%). Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDC13): d 8.09 (two s, 1H), 7.54 (two s, 1H), 7.31-7.12 (m, 5H), 5.66 (dd, 1H), 4.52-4.45 (m, 2H), 4.19-4.03 (m, 4H), 3.87-3.69 (m, 1H), 1.35-1.15 (m, 9H). 31P NMR (161 MHz, CDCI3): d 4.14 (s), 3.55 (s).
LC/MS = 539 (M+ H+).
Retention time: 1.94 min
LC: Thermo Electron Surveyor HPLC
MS: Finnigan LCQ Advantage MAX Mass Spectrometer
Column: Phenomenex Polar RP 30 mm X 4.6 mm
Solvents: Acetonitrile with 0.1% formic acid, Water with 0.1% formic acid Gradient: 0 min-O.l min 5% ACN, 0.1 min-1.95 min 5%-100% ACN, 1.95 min-3.5 min 100% ACN, 3.5 min-3.55 min 100%-5% ACN, 3.55 min-4 min 5% ACN. Preparation
Figure imgf000150_0001
30d-1
Compound 30d-l was prepared from 30a in a matter similar to that of 30d-2 substituting alanine ethyl ester hydrochloride for alanine isopropyl ester hydrochloride.
Compound (S)-PD-A-8c
Figure imgf000150_0002
(S)-30d-2 Compound 8
Figure imgf000150_0003
(S)-PD-A-8c Compound (S)-PD-A-8c was prepared in a matter similar to that of PD-A-8b substituting (S)-30d-2 for 30d-l. Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDC13): d 8.14 (s, IH), 7.60 (s, IH), 7.1-7.3 (m, 5H), 5.66 (dd, IH), 5.02 (m, IH), 4.50 (m, IH), 4.40 (m, IH), 4.1- 4.3 (m, 2H), 3.98 (m, IH), 3.78 (m, IH), 3.18 (brs, IH), 1.15-1.4 (m, 12H). 31P NMR (161 MHz, CDCl3): d 3.70 (s).
LC/MS = 553 (M + H+).
Preparation of (S)-30d-2
Figure imgf000151_0001
Alanine isopropyl ester hydrochloride (7.95 g, 47.4 mmol) was suspended in dichloromethane (100 mL). Compound 31a (10 g, 47.4 mmol) was added.
Triethylamine (13.2 mL, 95 mmol) was then dropwise added over a period of 15 min. (internal reaction temperature; -10°C ~ -3 °C). When the reaction was almost complete (by phosphorous NMR -nitrophenol (6.29 g, 45.0 mmol) was added as a solid in one portion. To the resulting slurry was added triethylamine (6.28 mL, 45 mmol) over a period of 15 min. The mixture was then warmed up to room temperature. When the reaction was complete, MTBE (100 mL) was added. The white precipitate was removed by filtration. The filter cake was washed with MTBE (3 x 50 mL). The filtrate and washings were combined and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (0 to 50% ethyl acetate / hexanes), affording compound 30d-2 as a 1:1 ratio of diastereomeric mixture (14.1 g, 77%). ¾ NMR (300 MHz, CDC13): 5 8.22 (2d, 2H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 7H), 5.0 (m, IH), 4.09 (m, IH), 3.96 (m, IH), 1.39 (2d, 3H), 1.22 (m, 6H). MS = 409.0 (M + H+), 407.2 (M - H+).
Figure imgf000152_0001
The two diastereomers were separated by chiral column chromatography under the following conditions;
Column: Chiralpak IC, 2 x 25 cm
Solvent system: 70% heptane and 30% isopropanol (IP A)
Flow rate: 6 mL/min.
Loading volume per run: 1.0 mL
Concentration of loading sample: 150 mg / mL in 70% heptane and 30% IPA (S)-compound 30d-2: retention time 43 min. 31P NMR (162.1 MHz, CDC13): δ -2.99 (s).
(R)-compound 30d-2: retention time 62 min. 31P NMR (162.1 MHz, CDCI3): δ -3.02 (s).
Alternatively, the two diastereomers were separated by crystallization under the following procedure; Compound 30d-2 was dissolved in diethyl ether (~10 mI7 gram). While stirring, hexanes was then added until the solution became turbid. Seed crystals (~10 mg / gram of compound 30d-2) were added to promote crystallization. The resulting suspension was gently stirred for 16 h, cooled to ~ 0 °C, stirred for an additional 2 h, and filtered to collect the crystalline material (recovery yield of the crystalline material 35%-35%). The crystalline material contains ~95% of (S)-compound 30d-2 and ~5% of (R)-compound 30d-2. Re-crystallization afforded 99%
diastereomerically pure (S)-isomer.
The following PD-A compounds as examples are made by the general procedures:
Compound PD-A-8d
Figure imgf000153_0001
Compound PD-A-8e
Figure imgf000153_0002
Compound PD-A-8f
Figure imgf000154_0001
Compound PD-A-8g
Figure imgf000154_0002
General procedure for preparation of a nucleoside prodrug (Method D):
Non-limiting examples of 3'-0-acyalted mono-phosphoramidate prodrugs comprising the instant invention may be prepared according to general Scheme 2.
Scheme 2
Figure imgf000155_0001
The general procedure comprises the reaction of PD-A (R4 = OH) with a carboxylic acid or an activated carboxylate such as an acyl chloride or an acid anhydride, which is generally known to those skilled in the art {Journal of Medicinal Chemistry, 2006, 49, 6614 and Organic Letters, 2003, 6, 807). When R8 = N¾, protection of the amino group may be necessary. Briefly, to a solution of compound PD-A in acetonitrile (2 mL) is added A^iV-dimethyformarnide dimethyl acetal (~ 1.1 eq.) and stirred at room temperature for 1 h. After the protection of 6-amino group is complete, the mixture is then concentrated to dryness. To the residue are added a dehydrating agent such as DCC (~ 4 eq.), acetonitrile and a carboxylic acid (~ 2 eq.). The mixture is stirred at room temperature for 24 -48 h. Water (0.2 mL) and trifluoroacetic acid (0.1 mL) are added at 0°C and stirred at room temperature for 64 h. Sodium bicarbonate was added at 0°C. The mixture is stirred at room temperature for 0.5 h and filtered. The filtrate is concentrated and the residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography to afford compound PD-B. If an acyl chloride or an acid anhydride is used, a suitable base, such as triethylamine, is added instead of a dehydrating agent.
Compound PD-B-8i
Figure imgf000156_0001
To a solution of PD-A-8b (100 mg, 0.1 mmol) in DCM (1.0 mL) under an atmosphere of argon at room temperature was added A^dimethylformamide- dimethylacetal (25 μί, 0.19 mmol). After 30 minutes, the reaction mixture was concentrated. The reaction was taken up in DCM and concentrated. This process was repeated twice. The resulting residue was taken up in THF (1.0 mL) and cooled to 0°C under an atmosphere of argon. To the solution was added triethylamine (79 L, 0.57 mmol) and DMAP (5mg, 0.04 mmol). After 5 minutes, isobutyryl chloride (60
Figure imgf000156_0002
0.57 mmol) was added. After 10 minutes, the reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature and was stirred for 3 hours. The mixture was cooled to 0°C, quenched with a 5% TFA solution in water, and then allowed to stir at room temperature for 4 hours. The resulting mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3x). The combined organic layers were dried with sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by RP HPLC (acetonitrile / water), affording PD-B-8i (71 mg, 61%). Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDC13): d 8.17 (two s, 1H), 7.66 (two s, 1H), 7.34-7.14 (m, 5H), 5.69 (dd, 1H), 5.56-5.43 (m, 1H), 4.55-4.01 (m, 5H), 3.79- 3.69 (m, 1H), 2.70-2.64 (m, 1H), 1.37-1.17 (m, 15H). 31P NMR (161 MHz, CDC13): d 2.99 (s), 2.88 (s).
LC/MS = 609 (M+ H+).
Retention time: 2.21 min
LC: Thermo Electron Surveyor HPLC
MS: Finnigan LCQ Advantage MAX Mass Spectrometer
Column: Phenomenex Polar RP 30 mm X 4.6 mm
Solvents: Acetonitrile with 0.1% formic acid, Water with 0.1% formic acid Gradient: 0 min-0.1 min 5% ACN, 0.1 min-1.95 min 5%-100% ACN, 1.95 min- min 100% ACN, 3.5 min-3.55 min 100%-5% ACN, 3.55 min-4 min 5% ACN.
The following PD-B compounds as examples are made by the general procedures: Compound PD-B-8j
Figure imgf000157_0001
Compound PD-B-!
Figure imgf000157_0002
Compound PD-B-81
Figure imgf000157_0003
Compound PD-B-8m
Figure imgf000158_0001
Compound PD-B-80
Figure imgf000158_0002
General procedure for preparation of a nucleoside prodrug (Method E): Non-limiting examples of 3 ' ,5 ' -cyclic mono-phosphoramidate prodrugs comprising the instant invention may be prepared according to general Scheme 3.
Scheme 3
Figure imgf000159_0001
40 Compound 41
Scheme 3 illustrates chemical processes that may be useful for preparation of compound PD-C. Accordingly, PD-Al is converted to PD-C in the presence of a base when Ar is substituted with an electron withdrawing group such as p-nitro or p- chloro group {European Journal of Medicinal Chemistry, 2009, 44, 3769).
Alternatively, compound 40 is converted to Compound 41 according to Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Letters, 2007, 17, 2452, which is then coupled with a amino acid ester salt to form PD-C. Compound PD-C-8q
Figure imgf000160_0001
PD-C-8q
A solution of PD-A-8p in DMSO is treated at room temperature with potassium /-butoxide (~1 eq.) and the resulting mixture is stirred for about 10 min. to about 2 h. The mixture is then cooled to 0°C and neutralized with IN HCl to ~ pH 6. The mixture is purified by HPLC to afford compound PD-C-8q.
Additionally, the following PD-C compounds as examples are made by the general procedures:
Compound PD-C-8r
Figure imgf000160_0002
Figure imgf000161_0001
Compound PD-D-811
Figure imgf000161_0002
Compound 8 is dissolved in PO(OMe)3 (0.1 - 0.5 M solution) and cooled to 0°C under argon. To this stirring solution is added POCI3 (1.0 - 5.0 eq.) dropwise, and the reaction mixture is allowed to warm to room temperature for about 2 -16 h. The resulting solution is added dropwise to a rapidly stirring solution of acetonitrile and 0.05 - 0.5 M aqueous KOH. When addition is complete, the solvents are removed under reduced pressure. The resulting residue is dissolved in water and purified by HPLC to give Compound 41-1.
Figure imgf000161_0003
Compound 41-1 Compound PD-D-8u A solution of Compound 41-1 in DCM and PO(OMe is prepared and cooled to 0°C. To this solution is added oxalyl chloride (1.0 - 5.0 eq.) followed by a catalytic amount of DMF. The mixture is allowed to stir for about 10 min. to about lh. When activation is complete, a large volume of 2-propanol is added to the reaction mixture and allowed to stir and warm to room temperature. The solvents are removed under reduced pressure, and the resulting crude material is purified by preparative HPLC to give Compound PD-D-8u.
Compound PD-E-8v
Figure imgf000162_0001
Compound 41-1 Compound PD-E-8v
Compound PD-E-8v is prepared from Compound 41-1 in a matter that of Compound PD-D-8u substituting 2-aminopropane for 2-propanol.
Compound PD-F-8w
Figure imgf000162_0002
Compound PD-F-8w Compound PD-F-8w is prepared in a matter similar to that of Compound 20 substituting Compound 8 for Compound 18.
Compound PD-G-8
Figure imgf000163_0001
Compound PD-G-8x
About 90 mM Compound 8 in THF is cooled to about -78°C and about 2.2 to about 5 equivalents of i-butylmagnesium chloride (about 1 M in THF) is added. The mixture is wanned to about 0°C for about 30 min and is again cooled to about -78°C. A solution of (25 -2-{[chloro(l-phenoxy)phosphoryl]amino}ethyl isobutyrate (WO2008085508) (1 M in THF, about 2 equivalents) is added dropwise. The cooling is removed and the reaction is stirred for about one to about 24 hours. The reaction is quenched with water and the mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate. The extracts are dried and evaporated and the residue purified by chromatography to give Compound PD-G-8X.
Figure imgf000163_0002
Compound 4 (about 0.04 mmol) and anhydrous MeOH (about 5 niL) is treated with acetic acid (about 5 niL) and the reaction is stirred overnight at room temperature. Saturated NaHCC is added to neutralize the reaction mixture and the crude material is purified using a HPLC system (acetonitrile-H20) to give 6. Compound 7
Figure imgf000164_0001
3b 7
To a dry, argon purged round bottom flask (50 mL) is added compound 3b (about 0.39 mmol) and anhydrous dichloromethane (about 10 mL). The flask is placed into a dry ice/acetone bath (~ -78°C) and the solution is stirred for about 10 min. BF3-Et20 (about 0.10 mL) is added dropwise and the reaction is stirred for about 10 min. Α1Μβ3 (about 1.16 mmol, 2.0 M in toluene) is then added. After a few minutes, the dry ice/acetone bath is removed and the reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature to about 45°C over about 4 h to about 4 d. A solution of pyridine (about 2 mL) in MeOH (about 10 mL) is added and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude material is purified by chromatography and is treated with ammonium hydroxide in methanol for about 16 h at about room temperature. The mixture is concentrated and the residue is purified by HPLC to give 7.
Compound 8
Figure imgf000164_0002
1a BuLi THF 8b
To a suspension of 7-bromoimidazo[l,2-fJ[l,2,4]triazin-4-amine (obtained according to ACS Medicinal Chemistry Letters, 2010, 1, 286; 375 mg, 1.75 mmol) in THF (4.0 mL) under an atmosphere of argon was added 1,2-bis-
[(chlorodimethyl)silanyl]ethane (452 mg, 2.10 mmol). After 60 min, the reaction was cooled to -78°C and BuLi (1.6 M in THF, 3.8 mL, 6.10 mmol) was added. After 10 min at -78°C, a solution of la (obtained according to WO 200631725, 782 mg, 2.10 mmol) in THF ( 1.0 mL) was added dropwise. The resulting mixture was stirred at - 78°C for 1 hour. Saturated aqueous ammonium chloride was added and allowed to warm to 0°C. Water was added until all solids became soluble. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic extract was dried with sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate / hexanes), affording 8b (606 mg, 59%) as a yellow solid.
LC/MS = 508 (M+ H+)
Retention time: 2.17-2.26 min
LC: Thermo Electron Surveyor HPLC
MS: Finnigan LCQ Advantage MAX Mass Spectrometer
Column: Phenomenex Polar RP 30 mm X 4.6 mm
Solvents: Acetonitrile with 0.1% formic acid, Water with 0.1% formic acid Gradient: 0 min-0.1 min 5% ACN, 0.1 min-1.95 min 5%-100% ACN, 1.95 min-3.5 min 100% ACN, 3.5 min-3.55 min 100%-5% ACN, 3.55 min-4 min 5% ACN.
Figure imgf000165_0001
To a solution of compound 8b (510 mg, 1.39 mmol) in dichloroethane (10.0 mL) at 0°C under an atmosphere of argon, was added triethyl silane (1.77 mL, 11.09 mmol) and then BF3 »Et20 (1.41 mL, 11.09 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 55°C for 16h. The reaction was cooled to 0°C and quenched with saturated NaHC03 (aq). The reaction was extracted with DCM and then EtOAc. The combined organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated.
The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes), affording 8c (453 mg, 64%). Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDC13): d 8.10-7.94 (m, 5H), 7.6-
7.33 (m, 7H), 5.91 (dd, 1H), 5.78 (d, .7=24.6 Hz, 1H), 4.87 (dd, 1H), 4.70 (m, 1H),
4.58 (dd, 1H), 1.31 (d, .7=22.4 Hz, 3H).
LC/MS = 491 (M+).
Retention time: 2.36 min.
LC: Thermo Electron Surveyor HPLC
MS: Finnigan LCQ Advantage MAX Mass Spectrometer
Column: Phenomenex Polar RP 30 mm X 4.6 mm
Solvents: Acetonitrile with 0.1% formic acid, Water with 0.1% formic acid
Gradient: 0 min-0.1 min 5% ACN, 0.1 min-1.95 min 5%-100% ACN, 1.95 min-3.5 min 100% ACN, 3.5 min-3.55 min 100%-5% ACN, 3.55 min-4 min 5% ACN.
Figure imgf000166_0001
8c Compound 8
To a solution of 8c (500 mg, 01.02 mmol) in THF (5.0 mL) was added lithium hydroxide (122 mg, 5.09 mmol) as a solution in ¾0 (5.0 mL) and was stirred at room temperature for lh. The reaction was cooled to 0°C and was neutralized with IN HCl in water (5.1 mL). The mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified by RP HPLC (water / acetonitrile), affording Compound 8 (185 mg, 64%). Ή NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD): d 7.97 (s, 1H), 7.63 (s, 1H), 5.54 (d, J=24.8 Hz, 1H), 4.03 (dd, 1H), 3.88 (m, 1H), 3.71 (dd, 1H), 1.80 (d, .7=22.1 Hz, 3H).
LC/MS = 284 (M + H+).
Retention time: 1.06 min.
LC: Thermo Electron Surveyor HPLC
MS: Finnigan LCQ Advantage MAX Mass Spectrometer Column: Phenomenex Polar RP 30 mm X 4.6 mm
Solvents: Acetonitrile with 0.1% formic acid, Water with 0.1% formic acid Gradient: 0 min-0.1 min 5% ACN, 0.1 min-1.95 min 5%-100% ACN, 1.95 min-3.5 min 100% ACN, 3.5 min-3.55 min 100%-5% ACN, 3.55 min-4 min 5% ACN. Alternative procedure for Compound 8
Figure imgf000167_0001
■e Compound 8
Compound le (crude obtained from the previous reaction step) was dissolved in EtOH. Excess sodium borohydride was added in portions until the reaction was nearly complete. The mixture was neutralized with acetic acid. The mixture was concentrated and the solid residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (0-10% MeOH / dichloromethane), affording compound 27 (210 mg, 50% in two steps).
Figure imgf000167_0002
Raney Ni (about 500 mg) was neutralized by washing with ¾0, and added to a solution of Id (about 100 mg) in ethanol (about 10 mL). The mixture was then heated to 80°C until the reaction is complete. The catalyst was removed by filtration and the solution was concentrated in vacuo. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified by HPLC to give 8.
Compound 9
Figure imgf000168_0001
Into a flask containing Compound 3 (120 mg, 0.39 mmoL, 1 equiv.) was added PO(OMe)3 (1.5 mL, 0.25 M) and cooled to 0°C before adding POClj (125 iL, 1.37 mmoL, 3.5 equiv.). The reaction mixture was allowed to stir for 5 hr before the reaction was quenched with water. It was directly purified by HPLC to furnish the monophosphate Compound 9.
LC MS m/z 387.95 [M + H+].
Compound 10
Figure imgf000168_0002
Into a flask containing Compound 9 (30 mg, 0.078 mmoL, 1 equiv.) was added NMP (0.8 mL, 0.1 M) followed by addition of TEA (43 pL, 0.31 mmoL, 4 equiv.), tetrabutylammonium bromide (25 mg, 0.078 mmoL, 1 equiv.) before adding chloromethylisopropyl carbonate (60 x , 0.38 mmoL, 5 equiv.). The reaction mixture was heated to 50°C and allowed to stir overnight. It was purified directly by HPLC, affording Compound 10. Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) d 7.98 (s, 1 H), 7.01 (d, J= 4.7 Hz, 1 H), 6.72 (d, J= 4.7
Hz, 1 H), 6.04 (bs, 2 H), 5.74 - 5.61 (m, 4 H), 4.91 (ddt, J = 12.6, 9.4, 6.3 Hz, 2 H),
4.64 - 4.28 (m, 4 H), 1.37 - 1.19 (m, 15 H).
31P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13) d -4.06.
,9F NMR (376 MHz, CDC13) d -76.58, -151.95 TFA salt.
LC MS m/z 620.03[M + H+].
Compound 11
Figure imgf000169_0001
11
A solution of Compound B-2 in DMSO is treated with about 3 mole equivalents of potassium i-butoxide for about 15 min to 24 hours. The reaction is quenched with IN HCl and Compound 11 is isolated by reverse-phase HPLC.
Compound 12
Figure imgf000170_0001
Figure imgf000170_0002
Compound lb (about 1 mmol) is placed in a steel bomb reactor. The reactor is charged with liquid ammonia (about 30 mL) and the mixture is stirred at about 0°C to 50°C for about 16 h. The ammonia is evaporated and the residue is purified to give 12a. A solution of 12a (about 100 mg) in ethanol (about 10 mL) is treated with Raney Ni (about 500 mg) that is neutralized by washing with ¾0. The mixture is then heated to about 35 to about 80°C until the reaction is complete. The catalyst is removed by filtration and the solution is concentrated in vacuo. The mixture is concentrated and the residue is purified by HPLC to give 12b. To a solution of compound 12b (about 50 mg) and T SCN (about 0.5 mmol) in acetonitrile (about 2.0 mL) at about 0°C is added TMSOTf (about 0.5 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for about 1 h, then at 65°C for about 3 d. The reaction is quenched with saturated NaHC03 at room temperature, and diluted with CI¾C02Et. The organic phase was separated, washed with brine, dried over Na2S04, filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified by RP-HPLC then dissolved in methanol (about 1 mL). Ammonium hydroxide (28% in water, about 0.8 mL) is added and the mixture is stirred at about room temperature for 16 h. The mixture is concentrated and the residue is purified by RP HPLC to give 12.
Compound 13
Figure imgf000171_0001
13
Compound 13 is prepared in the same manner as Compound 9 using
Compound 12 as a starting material.
Compound 14
Figure imgf000171_0002
14
Compound 14 is prepared by treating Compound 13 with about one to about five equivalents of DCC in pyridine and heating the reaction to reflux for about one to about 24 hours. Compound 14 is isolated by conventional ion exchange and reverse- phase HPLC.
Compound 15
Figure imgf000171_0003
15 A solution of about 0.4 mmol of Compound 14 in about 10 mL of DMF is treated with about 0.8 mmol of DIPEA and about 0.8 mmol of chloromethyl isopropyl carbonate (WO2007/027248). The reaction is heated to about 25 to about 80°C for about 15 min to about 24 hours. The solvent is removed under vacuum and the
Figure imgf000172_0001
Compound 3 (about 0.22 mmoL) is dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (about 2 mL) and chlorotrimethylsilane (about 0.17 mL) is added. The mixture is stirred at about 0 °C to about 25°C for about one to about 24 hours. Additional
chlorotrimethylsilane (about 0.1 mL) is added and the reaction is stirred for about one to about 24 hours. 4.4'-Dimethoxytrityl chloride (about 0.66 mmol) and DMAP (about 0.11 to about 0.22 mmol) is sequentially added. The mixture is stirred for about one to about 24 hours. A solution of TBAF (1.0 M, about 0.22 mL) in THF is added and the reaction is stirred for about one to about 24 hours. The mixture is partitioned between ethyl acetate and water. The ethyl acetate layer is dried and concentrated. The residue is purified chromatography to afford Compound 16. Compound 17
Figure imgf000172_0002
A mixture of about 1.25 mmol of Compound 16 and about 1.9 mmol of triethylammonium 2-(2,2-dimethyl-3-(trityloxy)propanoylthio)ethyl phosphinate (WO2008082601) is dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (about 19 mL). Pivaloyl chloride (about 2.5 mmol) is added dropwise at about -30 to about 0 °C and the solution is stirred at for about 30 min to about 24 hours. The reaction is diluted with methylene chloride and is neutralized with aqueous ammonium chloride (about 0.5M). The methylene chloride phase is evaporated and the residue is dried and is purified by chromatography to give Compound 17.
Compound 18
Figure imgf000173_0001
18
To a solution of about 0.49 mmol of Compound 17 in anhydrous carbon tetrachloride (about 5 mL) is added dropwise benzylamine (about 2.45 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred for about one to about 24 hours. The solvent is evaporated and the residue is purified by chromatography to give Compound 18.
Figure imgf000173_0002
A solution of about 2 mmol of Compound 18 in methylene chloride (about 10 mL) is treated with an aqueous solution of trifluoroacetic acid (90%, about 10 mL). The reaction mixture is stirred at about 25 to about 60 °C for about one to about 24 hours. The reaction mixture is diluted with ethanol, the volatiles are evaporated and the residue is purified by chromatography to give Compound 20.
Compound 21
Figure imgf000174_0001
About 90 mM Compound 2 in THF is cooled to about -78 °C and about 2.2 to about 5 equivalents of i-butylmagnesium chloride (about 1 M in THF) is added. The mixture is warmed to about 0 °C for about 30 min and is again cooled to about -78 °C .
A solution of (25 -2-{[chloro(l-phenoxy)phosphoryl]amino}propyl pivaloate (WO2008085508) (1 M in THF, about 2 equivalents) is added dropwise. The cooling is removed and the reaction is stirred for about one to about 24 hours. The reaction is quenched with water and the mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate. The extracts are dried and evaporated and the residue purified by chromatography to give Compound 21.
Compound 22
Figure imgf000174_0002
22a
Compound 22a was obtained in a procedure similar to that for preparation of
C-la.
Ή NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) d 8.11 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 2 H), 8.02 (s, 1 H), 7.48 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 2 H), 7.42 - 7.25 (m, 4 H), 7.21 (dt, J= 14.9, 5.5 Hz, 2 H), 7.08 (t, J = 7.3 Hz, 2 H), 5.17 - 5.03 (m, 2 H), 4.99 (dd, J= 16.5, 9.7 Hz, 2 H), 3.44 (s, 1H), 3.35 - 3.21 (m, 2 H), 3.19 (d, /= 9.2 Hz, 1H), 3.00 - 2.80 (m, 2 H).
31P NMR (162 MHz, CDC13) d 4.27.
LC MS m/z 452.09 [M + H+].
Figure imgf000175_0001
22b
Compound 22b was obtained in a procedure similar to that for preparation of C-l using Compound 3 and 22a.
Ή NMR (400 MHz, CD3OD) d 7.76 (d, J= 6.3 Hz, 1H), 7.38 (t, J= 8.2 Hz, 1 H),
7.27 - 7.12 (m, 4 H), 7.06 - 6.81 (m, 3 H), 6.74 (dd, J = 4.6, 3.5 Hz, 1 H), 4.95 - 4.79 (m, 1 H), 4.35 - 3.90 (m, 4 H), 3.23 (dt, J= 3.2, 1.6 Hz, 3H), 3.18 - 3.05 (m, 2 H), 2.82 (dt, J= 14.7, 7.3 Hz, 2 H), 1.15 (d, J= 22 A Hz, 3 H).
31P NMR (162 MHz, CD3OD) d 10.76, 10.71.
LC MS m/z 620.05 [M + H+].
Figure imgf000175_0002
5 Compound 22
Into a flask containing the 22b (50 mg, 0.08 mmoL, 1 equiv.) was added ethanol (4 mL) followed by Pd(OH)2 ( 56 mg, 0.08 mmoL, 1 equiv.) and ammonium formate (42 mg, 0.64 mmoL, 8 equiv.). The reaction was heated to 80°C for about an
10 hour. The solid was filtered off and the material purified by HPLC.
¾ NM (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) d 10.72 (s, 1H), 7.91 (s, 1 H), 7.95 - 7.89 (bs, 2 H), 7.41 (d, J= 7.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.26 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.19 - 6.66 (m, 3 H), 4.20 - 3.75 (m, 3 H), 2.99 (dd, J = 16.5, 9.6 Hz, 2 H), 2.89 - 2.70 (m, 2 H), 2.48 - 2.58 (m, 8 H), 1.10 (d, J= 22.3 Hz, 3 H).
15 31P NMR (162 MHz, DMSO-d6) d 7.49.
19F NMR (376 MHz, DMSO-d6) d -154.89.
LC MS m/z 530.21 [M + H ].
C
Figure imgf000176_0001
Compound 3 Compound 23
Compound 3 (250mg, 0.82mmol) was dissolved in PO(OMe)3 (5 mL, 0.16M) 25 and cooled to 0°C under argon. To this stirring solution was added POCI3 (0.32 mL, 4.1 mmol) slowly dropwise, and the reaction mixture allowed to warm to room temperature for 16 h. The resulting solution was added dropwise to a rapidly stirring solution of acetonitrile (400 mL) and 0.08M aqueous KOH (300 mL). When addition was complete, the reaction progress was checked by LCMS. When the reaction was complete, solvents were removed under reduced pressure. The resulting solid residue was dissolved in water and purified by HPLC to give 140mg of Compound 23 (yield; 47%).
Ή-NMR (400MHz; CD3OD) : d 8.15 (s, 1H), 7.40 (d, 1H; J = 4.8Hz), 7.09 (d, 1H; J = 4.8Hz), 4.64 (dd, 1H; J = 24Hz, 7.2Hz ), 4.50-4.36 (m, 3H), 1.32 (d, 3H; J=22Hz). l 9F-NMR (376MHz; CD3OD) : d -153.11.
1P-NMR (162MHz; CD3OD) : d -2.20.
MS [M + H+] = 370.2.
Figure imgf000177_0001
Compound 23 Compound
A solution of Compound 23 (7mg, 0.02 mmol) in DCM (2 mL) and PO(OMe)3 (1 mL) was prepared and cooled to 0°C. To this solution was added oxalyl-Cl (10 μί) followed by DMF (2 μί). The mixture was allowed to stir for 1 min before an aliquot was taken out and quenched in MeOH and then checked by LCMS for activation. Successive amounts of oxalyl-Cl (10 μί) and DMF (2 μί) were added until activation was complete. At this point, a large volume of 2-propanol (5 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and allowed to stir and warm to room temperature. Once the reaction was complete, the solvents were removed under reduced pressure, and the resulting crude material was purified by preparative HPLC to give 5.5 mg of Compound 24 (yield 70%).
'H-NMR (400MHz; DMSO-d6) : d 8.26 (br, 1H), 8.15 (br, 1H), 7.97 (s, 1H), 7.00 (d, 1H; J = 4.4Hz), 6.88 (d, 1H; J = 4.4Hz), 4.59-4.51 (m, 2H), 4.37-4.25 (m, 2H), 1.23 (d, 3H; J=22.8Hz). 19F-NMR (376MHz; CD3OD) : d -151.72.
3 IP-NMR (162MHz; CD3OD) : d -5.69.
MS [M + H+] = 412.0.
Figure imgf000178_0001
Compound 25 was prepared from Compound 23 in a matter similar to that of Compound 24 substituting the heptyl ester of alanine for 2-propanol (yield 5.3%). 'H-NMR (400MHZ; CD3OD) : d 7.91 (s, 1H), 6.98 (d, 1H; J = 4.8Hz), 6.92 (d, 1H; J = 4.8Hz), 5.29 (dd, IH; J = 24.4Hz, 8.8Hz), 4.66-4.60 (m, 2H), 4.48-4.40 (m, 1H), 4.15-4.1 l(m, 3H), 3.92(dd, IH; J = 9.6Hz, 7.2Hz), 1.67-1.64 (m, 3H), 1.40-1.27 (m, 15H), 0.91-0.87(m, 6H).
19F-NMR (376MHz; CD3OD) : d -151.46.
3IP-NMR (162MHz; CD3OD) : d 7.36.
MS [M + H+] = 539.4.
Compound 26
Figure imgf000178_0002
Compound 26
Compound 26 is prepared from compound 22 in a matter similar to that for preparation of compound 10. Antiviral Activity
Another aspect of the invention relates to methods of inhibiting viral infections, comprising the step of treating a sample or subject suspected of needing such inhibition with a composition of the invention.
Within the context of the invention samples suspected of containing a virus include natural or man-made materials such as living organisms; tissue or cell cultures; biological samples such as biological material samples (blood, serum, urine, cerebrospinal fluid, tears, sputum, saliva, tissue samples, and the like); laboratory samples; food, water, or air samples; bioproduct samples such as extracts of cells, particularly recombinant cells synthesizing a desired glycoprotein; and the like. Typically the sample will be suspected of containing an organism which induces a viral infection, frequently a pathogenic organism such as a tumor virus. Samples can be contained in any medium including water and organic solvenftwater mixtures. Samples include living organisms such as humans, and man made materials such as cell cultures.
If desired, the anti-virus activity of a compound of the invention after application of the composition can be observed by any method including direct and indirect methods of detecting such activity. Quantitative, qualitative, and semiquantitative methods of determining such activity are all contemplated.
Typically one of the screening methods described above are applied, however, any other method such as observation of the physiological properties of a living organism are also applicable.
The antiviral activity of a compound of the invention can be measured using standard screening protocols that are known. For example, the antiviral activity of a compound can be measured using the following general protocols.
Cell-based Flavivirus Immunodetection assay
BHK21 or A549 cells are trypsinized, counted and diluted to 2xl05 cells/mL in Hams F-12 media (A549 cells) or RPMI-1640 media (BHK21 cells) supplemented with 2% fetal bovine serum (FBS) and 1 % penicillin/streptomycin. 2xl04 cells are dispensed in a clear 96-well tissue culture plates per well and placed at 37°C, 5% CO2 overnight. On the next day, the cells are infected with viruses at multiplicity of infection (MOI) of 0.3 in the presence of varied concentrations of test compounds for 1 hour at 37°C and 5% CO2 for another 48 hours. The cells are washed once with PBS and fixed with cold methanol for 10 min. After washing twice with PBS, the fixed cells are blocked with PBS. containing 1% FBS and 0.05% Tween-20 for 1 hour at room temperature. The primary antibody solution (4G2) is then added at a concentration of 1 :20 to 1 : 100 in PBS containing 1 % FBS and 0.05% Tween-20 for 3 hours. The cells are then washed three times with PBS followed by one hour incubation with horseradish peroxidase(H P)-conjugated anti-mouse IgG (Sigma, 1 :2000 dilution). After washing three times with PBS, 50 microliters of 3,3',5,5'- tetramethylbenzidine (TMB) substrate solution (Sigma) is added to each well for two minutes. The reaction is stopped by addition of 0.5 M sulfuric acid. The plates are read at 450 nm absorbance for viral load quantification. After measurement, the cells are washed three times with PBS followed by incubation with propidium iodide for 5 min. The plate is read in a Tecan Safire™ reader (excitation 537 nm, emission 617 nm) for cell number quantification. Dose response curves are plotted from the mean absorbance versus the log of the concentration of test compounds. The EC50 is calculated by non-linear regression analysis. A positive control such as N-nonyl- deoxynojirimycin may be used.
Cell-based Flavivirus cytopathic effect assay
For testing against West Nile virus or Japanese encephalitis virus, BHK21 cells are trypsinized and diluted to a concentration of 4 x 105 cells/mL in RPMI-1640 media supplemented with 2% FBS and 1 % penicillin/streptomycin. For testing against dengue virus, Huh7 cells are trypsinized and diluted to a concentration of 4 x 105 cells/mL in DMEM media supplemented with 5% FBS and 1%
penicillin/streptomycin. A 50 microliter of cell suspension (2 x 104 cells) is dispensed per well in a 96-well optical bottom PIT polymer-based plates (Nunc). Cells are grown overnight in culture medium at 37°C, 5% C(¾, and then infected with West Nile virus (e.g. B956 strain) or Japanese encephalitis virus (e.g. Nakayama strain) at MOI = 0.3, or with dengue virus (e.g. DEN-2 NGC strain) at MOI = 1, in the presence of different concentrations of test compounds. The plates containing the virus and the compounds are further incubated at 37°C, 5% C(½ for 72 hours. At the end of incubation, 100 microliters of CellTiter-Glo™ reagent is added into each well.
Contents are mixed for 2 minutes on an orbital shaker to induce cell lysis. The plates are incubated at room temperature for 10 minutes to stabilize luminescent signal. Luminescence reading is recorded using a plate reader. A positive control such as N- nonyl-deoxynojirimycin may be used.
Antiviral Activity in a Mouse Model of Dengue Infection.
Compounds are tested in vivo in a mouse model of dengue virus infection (Schul et al. J. Infectious Dis. 2007; 195:665-74). Six to ten week old AG129 mice (B&K Universal Ltd, HU, UK) are housed in individually ventilated cages. Mice are injected intraperitoneally with 0.4 mL TSV01 dengue virus 2 suspension. Blood samples are taken by retro orbital puncture under isoflurane anesthesia. Blood samples are collected in tubes containing sodium citrate to a final concentration of 0.4%, and immediately centrifuged for 3 minutes at 6000g to obtain plasma. Plasma (20 microliters) is diluted in 780 microliters PMI-1640 medium and snap frozen in liquid nitrogen for plaque assay analysis. The remaining plasma is reserved for cytokine and NS1 protein level determination. Mice develop dengue viremia rising over several days, peaking on day 3 post-infection.
For testing of antiviral activity, a compound of the invention is dissolved in vehicle fluid, e.g. 10% ethanol, 30% PEG 300 and 60% D5W (5% dextrose in water; or 6N HC1 (1.5 eq):lN NaOH (pH adjusted to 3.5): 100 mM citrate buffer pH 3.5 (0.9% v/v:2.5% v/v: 96.6% v/v). Thirty six 6-10 week old AG129 mice are divided into six groups of six mice each. All mice are infected with dengue virus as described above (day 0). Group 1 is dosed by oral gavage of 200 mL/mouse with 0.2 mg/kg of a compound of the invention twice a day (once early in the morning and once late in the afternoon) for three consecutive days starting on day 0 (first dose just before dengue infection). Groups 2, 3 and 4 are dosed the same way with 1 mg/kg, 5 mg/kg and 25 mg/kg of the compound, respectively. A positive control may be used, such as (2R,3R,4R,5R)-2-(2-amino-6-hydroxy-purin-9-yl)-5-hydroxymethyl-3-iriethyl- tetrahydro-furan-3,4-diol, dosed by oral gavage of 200 microliters/mouse the same way as the previous groups. A further group is treated with only vehicle fluid.
On day 3 post-infection approximately 100 microliter blood samples (anti- coagulated with sodium citrate) are taken from the mice by retro-orbital puncture under isoflurane anesthesia. Plasma is obtained from each blood sample by centrifugation and snap frozen in liquid nitrogen for plague assay analysis. The collected plasma samples are analyzed by plague assay as described in Schul et al. Cytokines are also analyzed as described by Schul. NS1 protein levels are analyzed using a Platelia™ kit (BioRad Laboratories). An anti-viral effect is indicated by a reduction in cytokine levels and/orNSl protein levels.
Typically, reductions in viremia of about 5-100 fold, more typically 10-60 fold, most typically 20-30 fold, are obtained with 5-50 mg/kg bid dosages of the compounds of the invention.
HCV IC5o Determination
Assay Protocol: Either wild type or S282T (Migliaccio, et al, J. Biol. Chem.
2003, 49164-49170; Klumpp, et al., J. Biol. Chem. 2006, 3793-3799) mutant polymerase enzyme was used in this assay. NS5b polymerase assay (40 μί) was assembled by adding 28 μΙ polymerase mixture (final concentration: 50 mM Tris- HC1 at pH 7.5, 10 mM KCL, 5 mM MgCl2, 1 mM DTT, 10 mM EDTA, 4 ng/μί of RNA template, and 75 nM HCV Δ21 NS5b polymerase) to assay plates followed by 4 LL of compound dilution. The polymerase and compound were pre-incubated at 35°C for 10 minute before the addition of 8 ΐ^ of nucleotide substrate mixture (33P- a-labeled competing nucleotide at K and 0.5 mM of the remaining three nucleotides). The assay plates were covered and incubated at 35°C for 90 min. Reactions were then filtered through 96-well DEAE-81 filter plates via vacuum. The filter plates were then washed under vacuum with multiple volumes of 0.125 M NaHPC , water, and ethanol to remove unincorporated label. Plates were then counted on TopCount to assess the level of product synthesis over background controls. The IC50 value is determined using Prism fitting program.
Preferably, compounds described herein inhibited NS5b polymerase with an ICJO'S below 1000 μΜ, more preferably below 100 μΜ, and most preferably below 10 μΜ. For example, compound TP-1 has an IC50 of 0.15 μΜ against both wild type HCV polymerase and the S282T mutant enzyme. Table II below shows the activity of TP-1 and TP-2 against both wild type and the S282T mutant enzyme compared to the activities obtained with the triphosphate of 2'-methyl guanidine and the triphosphate of (2R,3R,4R,5R)-2-(4-aminopyrrolo[l,2-fJtl,2,4]triazin-7-yl)-3,4- dihydroxy-5-(hydroxymethyl)-3-methyl-tetrahydrofuran-2-carbonitrile. This demonstrates that replacing the 2' OH of the pyiTolo[l,2-fJ[l,2,4]triazin-7-yl nucleosides with a 2' F unexpectedly confers activity against resistant S282T HCV mutant strains of virus.
Table II
Figure imgf000183_0001
Figure imgf000184_0001
HCV ECso Determination
Replicon cells were seeded in 96-well plates at a density of 8 x 103 cells per well in 100 of culture medium, excluding Geneticin. Compound was serially diluted in 100% DMSO and then added to the cells at a 1 :200 dilution, achieving a final concentration of 0.5% DMSO and a total volume of 200 iL. Plates were incubated at 37°C for 3 days, after which culture medium was removed and cells were lysed in lysis buffer provided by Promega's luciferase assay system. Following the manufacturer's instruction, 100 iL of luciferase substrate was added to the lysed cells and luciferase activity was measured in a TopCount luminometer. Preferably, compounds described herein have EC50's below 1000 μΜ, more preferably below 100 μΜ, and most preferably below 10 μΜ. The activities of representative compounds of Formula I are shown in the Table III below.
Table III
Figure imgf000185_0001
C-6 11
10 6.5-8
22 31-45
23 39.4-40.3
24 40.3-70.5
25 9.7-10
PD-A-8b 0.68
The cytotoxicity of a compound of the invention can be determined using the following general protocol.
Metabolism Studies:
Applicants have observed that monophosphate prodrugs of nucleoside analogs with a nitrogen at the X1 position can have enhanced activity over their counterparts with a carbon at the X1 position. This difference in activity correlates to the amount of the active triphosphate analogs of the compounds in cells. This can be quantified by a metabolism study which quantifies the intracellular concentration of the triphosphate analogs. The higher intracellular concentration of the triphosphate metabolite correlates to the prodrug with enhanced activity.
For example, comparison of the prodrug compound B-7 with prodrug compound PD-A-8b shows increased activity when the X1 position is nitorgen. This can be observed in Table III, where the HCV EC50 for the compound where the X1 position is nitrogen (compound PD-A-8b) is 0.68 μΜ compared to 63-73 μΜ for compound B-7. The activation of prodrug analog PD-A-8b (to its triphosphate analog TP-8a) was found to be more than two orders of magnitude more efficient than that observed for its prodrug counterpart where the X1 position is carbon, B-7 (to its triphosphate analog TP-3), as seen in Table IV.
Experimental: Huh-luc/neo replicon cells containing HCV genotype lb subgenomic replicons were maintained in Dulbecco's modified eagle medium containing glutamax supplemented with 10% heat inactivated fetal bovine serum, penicillin- streptomycin, and G418 disulphate salt solution. Cells were transferred to twelve well tissue culture plates by trypsonization and grown to confluency (0.88 X 106 cells/well). Cells were treated for 24 hours with 10 μΜ nucleoside, or 10 μΜ prodrug. After 24 hours, cells were washed 2 times with 2.0 mL ice cold 0.9% sodium chloride saline. Cells were then scraped into 0.5 mL 70% methanol (MeOH) and frozen overnight to facilitate the extraction of nucleotide metabolites. Extracted cell material in 70% MeOH was transferred into tubes and dried. After drying, samples were resuspended in ImM Ammonium phosphate pH 8.5 containing internal standard (100 nM C1ATP).
Intracellular levels of the nucleoside triphosphates were quantified based on authentic standard curves by liquid chromatography coupled to tandem mass spectrometry.
Results
Table IV: Intracellular triphosphate analog concentrations formed in Huh-luc/neo replicon cells following 24 hour incubations with 10 μΜ PD-A-8b and B-7.
Figure imgf000187_0001
Cytotoxicity Cell Culture Assay (Determination of CC50):
The assay is based on the evaluation of cytotoxic effect of tested compounds using a metabolic substrate.
Assay protocol for determination of CC50:
1. Maintain MT-2 cells in RPMI-1640 medium supplemented with 5% fetal bovine serum and antibiotics. 2. Distribute the cells into a 96-well plate (20,000 cell in 100 μΐ, media per well) and add various concentrations of the tested compound in triplicate (100 μίΛνβΙΙ). Include untreated control.
3. Incubate the cells for 5 days at 37°C.
4. Prepare XTT solution (6 ml per assay plate) in dark at a concentration of 2mg ml in a phosphate-buffered saline pH 7.4. Heat the solution in a water-bath at 55°C for 5 min. Add 50 of N-methylphenazonium methasulfate (5 μ|>/πιί) per 6 mL of XTT solution.
5. Remove 100 ΐ, media from each well on the assay plate and add 100 μΐ, of the XTT substrate solution per well. Incubate at 37°C for 45 to 60 min in a CO2 incubator.
6. Add 20 μΐ^ of 2% Triton X-100 per well to stop the metabolic conversion of XTT.
7. Read the absorbance at 450 nm with subtracting off the background at 650 nm.
8. Plot the percentage absorbance relative to untreated control and estimate the CC50 value as drug concentration resulting in a 50% inhibition of the cell growth. Consider the absorbance being directly proportional to the cell growth.
All publications, patents, and patent documents cited herein above are incorporated by reference herein, as though individually incorporated by reference. The invention has been described with reference to various specific and preferred embodiments and techniques. However, one skilled in the art will understand that many variations and modifications may be made while remaining within the spirit and scope of the invention.

Claims

is claimed is
A compound of Formula I:
Figure imgf000189_0001
Formula I
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof;
wherein:
R1 is (Ci-C8)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, (Ci-C8)substituted alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl;
R is halogen;
each R3, R4, or R5 is independently H, ORA, N(RA)2, N3, CN, N02, S(0)NRA, halogen, (Ci--C8)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, (Ci-Cg)substituted alkyl,
(C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkenyl, (C2-Cg)alkynyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkynyl, or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl;
or any two of R3, R4 or R5 on adjacent carbon atoms when taken together are - 0(CO)0- or when taken together with the ring carbon atoms to which they are attached form a double bond;
R6 is H, ORA, N(RA)2, N3, CN, N02, S(0)NRA, -C(=0)RH , -C(=0)ORN , - C(=0)NRNR12, -C(=0)SRN, -S(0)R] 1 , -S(0)2RH, -S(0)(ORU), -S(0)2(ORN), -S02NR"R12, halogen, (d-C8)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, (C,-C8)substituted alkyl, (C2-~C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)substituted alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl,
(C2-C8)substituted alkynyl, or aryl(C] -C8)alkyl; each n is independently 0, 1 , or 2;
each Ra is independently H, (C1-C8)alkyl, (C2-Cg)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl, aryl(C,-C8)alkyl, (C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, -C(=0)Rn, -C(=0)ORu, -C(=0)NRn -C(=0)SRn, -S(0)Ru, -S(0)2Ru, -S(0)(ORn), -S(0)2(ORn), or -S02NRHR12;
R7 is H, -C(=0)R1 !, -C(=0)ORn, -C(=0)NRnR12, -C(=0)SRH, -S(0)Rn, S(0)2Rn, -S(0)(OR! 1), -S(0)2(ORH), -S02NRHR12, or
Figure imgf000190_0001
each Y or Y1 is, independently, O, S, NR, ^(OXR), N(OR), +N(0)(OR), or N-NR2;
W1 and W2, when taken together, are -Y3(C(Ry)2)3Y3-; or one of W1 or W2 together with either R3 or R4 is -Y3- and the other of W1 or W2 is Formula la; or W1 and W2 are each, independently, a group of the Formula la:
Figure imgf000190_0002
Formula la
wherein:
each Y2 is independently a bond, O, CR2, NR, +N(0)(R), N(OR), +N(0)(OR),
N-NR .-2, S, S-S, S(O), or S(0)2;
each Y3 is independently O, S, or NR;
M2 is 0, 1 or 2;
each Rx is independently Ry or the formula:
Figure imgf000191_0001
wherein:
each Mia, Ml c, and Mid is independently 0 or 1 ;
M12c is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1 1 or 12;
each Ry is independently H, F, CI, Br, I, OH, R, -C(=Y!)R, -C(=Y1)OR, - C(=Y1)N(R)2, -N(R)2, -+N(R)3, -SR, -S(0)R, -S(0)2R, -S(0)(OR), -S(0)2(OR), - OC(=Y])R, -OC(=Y')OR, -OC(=Y')(N(R)2), -SC(=Y')R, -SC(=Y!)OR, - SC(=Y1)(N(R)2), -N(R)C(=Y')R, -N(R)C(=Y!)OR, -N(R)C(=Y1)N(R)2, -S02NR2, -CN, -N3, -NO2, -OR, or W3; or when taken together, two Ry on the same carbon atom form a carbocyclic ring of 3 to 7 carbon atoms;
each R is independently H, (Ci-C8) alkyl, (Cj-Cg) substituted alkyl, (C2-
Cg)alkenyl, (C2-C8) substituted alkenyl, (C2-Cg) alkynyl, (C2-C8) substituted alkynyl, C6-C2o aryl, C6-C2o substituted aryl, C2-C20 heterocyclyl, C2-C20 substituted heterocyclyl, arylalkyl or substituted arylalkyl;
W3 is W4 or W5; W4 is R, -0(Υ¾ -C(Yl)W5, -S02Ry, or -S02W5; and W5 is a carbocycle or a heterocycle wherein W5 is independently substituted with 0 to 3 Ry groups;
each X1 or X2 is independently C-R10 or N;
each R8 is halogen, NRnR12, N(Rn)ORn, NR1 INR11R12, N3, NO, N02, CHO, CN, -CH(=NRU), -CH=NNHRn, -CH=N(ORn), -CH(ORu)2, -C(=0)NRnR12, -C(=S)NRnR12, -C(=0)ORn, (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-C8)alkynyl,
(C4-C8)carbocyclylalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl,
Figure imgf000191_0002
-S(0)„(Ci-C8)alkyl, aryl(C1-C8)alkyl, OR1 1 or SR11;
each R9 or R10 is independently H, halogen, NRnR12, N(Rn)ORn,
NRuNRnR12, N3, NO, N02, CHO, CN, -CH(=NRn), -CH=NHNRn, -CH=N(OR1 !), -CH(ORn)2, -C(=0)NRnR12, -C(=S)NR1 ]R12, -C(=0)ORn, R11, OR11 or SR1 1; each Ru or R1Z is independently H, (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-C8)alkenyl, (C2-
Cg)alkynyl, (C4-Cg)carbocyclylalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -C(0)(C,-C8)alkyl, -S(0)n(Ci-C8)alkyl or aryl(Ci-C8)alkyl; or Rn and R12 taken together with a nitrogen to which they are both attached form a 3 to 7 membered heterocyclic ring wherein any one carbon atom of said heterocyclic ring can optionally be replaced with -0-, -S- or -NRa-;
wherein each (Ci-Cg)alkyl, (C2-Cg)alkenyl, (C2-Cg)alkynyl or aryl(Ci-Cg)alkyl of each R1, R3, R4, R5, R6, R11 or R12 is, independently, optionally substituted with one or more halo, hydroxy, CN, N3, N(Ra)2 or ORa; and wherein one or more of the nonterminal carbon atoms of each said (Ci-Cg)alkyl may be optionally replaced with -0-, -S- or -NRa.
A compound according to claim 1 represented by Formula II
Figure imgf000192_0001
Formula II wherein each Y and Y1 is O; X1 is CR10 or N and X2 is CH; or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof.
3. A compound according to claim 2 wherein R is halogen, NR l ln R12
N(Ru)ORH, NRnNRnR12, OR1 1 or SR11.
4. A compound according to claim 3 wherein R9 is H, halogen, SR1 1 or NR1 ]R
5. A compound according to claim 4 wherein R6 is H, ORa, CN, methyl, ethenyl, or ethynyl.
6. A compound according to claim 5 wherein R6 is H.
7. A compound according to claim 5 wherein R6 is CN
8. A compound according to claim 5 wherein R4 is OR
A compound according to claim 8 represented by Formula III
Figure imgf000193_0001
Formula III
wherein R1 is methyl or ethynyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof..
10. A compound according to claim 8 wherein R7 is H or
Figure imgf000193_0002
A compound according to claim 10 wherein R
Figure imgf000194_0001
12. A compound according to claim 8 wherein R is C¾.
Figure imgf000194_0002
Figure imgf000195_0001
Figure imgf000196_0001
Figure imgf000197_0001
196
Figure imgf000198_0001
Figure imgf000199_0001
Figure imgf000200_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof.
14. A compound useful for the preparation of a compound of Formula I selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000200_0002
Figure imgf000201_0001
or salts or esters thereof.
15. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
16. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 15 further comprising at least one additional therapeutic agent selected from the group consisting of interferons, ribavirin or its analogs, HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha- glucosidase 1 inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, antagonists of the renin-angiotensin system, endothelin antagonists, other anti-fibrotic agents, nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, HCV NS5A inhibitors, TLR-7 agonists, cyclophillin inhibitors, HCV IRES inhibitors, pharmacokinetic enhancers and other drugs for treating HCV; or mixtures thereof.
17. A method of treating a Flaviviridae virus infection comprising administering to a mammal in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or pharmaceutical composition of claim 1.
18. The method of claim 17 wherein the viral infection is a Hepatitis C virus infection.
19. The method of claim 18 wherein the viral infection is caused by a S282T mutant of Hepatitis C virus.
20. The method of claim 17 further comprising administering at least one additional therapeutic agent selected from the group consisting of interferons, ribavirin or its analogs, HCV NS3 protease inhibitors, NS5a inhibitors, alpha- glucosidase 1 inhibitors, hepatoprotectants, mevalonate decarboxylase antagonists, antagonists of the renin- angiotensin system, endothelin antagonists, other anti-fibrotic agents, nucleoside or nucleotide inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, non-nucleoside inhibitors of HCV NS5B polymerase, HCV NS5A inhibitors, TLR-7 agonists, cyclophillin inhibitors, HCV IRES inhibitors, pharmacokinetic enhancers and other drugs for treating HCV; or mixtures thereof.
PCT/US2011/028897 2010-09-20 2011-03-17 2' -fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment WO2012039787A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US12/885,917 2010-09-20
US12/885,917 US7973013B2 (en) 2009-09-21 2010-09-20 2'-fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2012039787A1 true WO2012039787A1 (en) 2012-03-29

Family

ID=44275983

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2011/028897 WO2012039787A1 (en) 2010-09-20 2011-03-17 2' -fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (1) US7973013B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2012039787A1 (en)

Cited By (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8853171B2 (en) 2008-04-23 2014-10-07 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1′-substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
US9090642B2 (en) 2010-07-19 2015-07-28 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for the preparation of diasteromerically pure phosphoramidate prodrugs
US9296769B2 (en) 2011-08-16 2016-03-29 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Tenofovir alafenamide hemifumarate
US9724360B2 (en) 2014-10-29 2017-08-08 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating Filoviridae virus infections
US10065958B2 (en) 2010-07-22 2018-09-04 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods and compounds for treating Paramyxoviridae virus infections
US10251904B2 (en) 2015-09-16 2019-04-09 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating arenaviridae and coronaviridae virus infections
JP2019521149A (en) * 2016-07-14 2019-07-25 エフ．ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲーＦ． Ｈｏｆｆｍａｎｎ−Ｌａ Ｒｏｃｈｅ Ａｋｔｉｅｎｇｅｓｅｌｌｓｃｈａｆｔ 6,7-Dihydro-4H-pyrazolo [1,5-a] pyrazine compounds and 6,7-dihydro-4H-triazolo [1,5-a] pyrazine compounds for the treatment of infectious diseases
US10675296B2 (en) 2017-07-11 2020-06-09 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compositions comprising an RNA polymerase inhibitor and cyclodextrin for treating viral infections
US10682368B2 (en) 2017-03-14 2020-06-16 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of treating feline coronavirus infections
US10836787B2 (en) 2017-05-01 2020-11-17 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Crystalline forms of (S)-2-ethylbutyl 2-(((S)-(((2R,3S,4R,5R)-5- (4-aminopyrrolo[2,1-f] [1,2,4]triazin-7-yl)-5-cyano-3,4-dihydroxytetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methoxy)(phenoxy) phosphoryl)amino)propanoate
US10988498B2 (en) 2009-09-21 2021-04-27 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Processes and intermediates for the preparation of 1′-substituted carba-nucleoside analogs
US11331331B2 (en) 2017-12-07 2022-05-17 Emory University N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
WO2022142477A1 (en) * 2020-12-30 2022-07-07 Southern University Of Science And Technology Methods and modified nucleosides for treating coronavirus infections
US11491169B2 (en) 2020-05-29 2022-11-08 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Remdesivir treatment methods
US11613553B2 (en) 2020-03-12 2023-03-28 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of preparing 1′-cyano nucleosides
US11628181B2 (en) 2014-12-26 2023-04-18 Emory University N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
US11660307B2 (en) 2020-01-27 2023-05-30 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating SARS CoV-2 infections
US11701372B2 (en) 2020-04-06 2023-07-18 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Inhalation formulations of 1'-cyano substituted carba-nucleoside analogs
US11780844B2 (en) 2022-03-02 2023-10-10 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US11814406B2 (en) 2020-08-27 2023-11-14 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US11939347B2 (en) 2020-06-24 2024-03-26 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1′-cyano nucleoside analogs and uses thereof

Families Citing this family (47)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
MY164523A (en) 2000-05-23 2017-12-29 Univ Degli Studi Cagliari Methods and compositions for treating hepatitis c virus
CN101099745A (en) 2000-05-26 2008-01-09 艾登尼科斯（开曼）有限公司 Methods and compositions for treating flaviviruses and pestiviruses
PT1576138T (en) 2002-11-15 2017-05-03 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2'-methyl nucleosides in combination with interferon and flaviviridae mutation
US8173621B2 (en) 2008-06-11 2012-05-08 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Nucleoside cyclicphosphates
SG172361A1 (en) 2008-12-23 2011-07-28 Pharmasset Inc Nucleoside analogs
US8716263B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2014-05-06 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Synthesis of purine nucleosides
EP2376088B1 (en) 2008-12-23 2017-02-22 Gilead Pharmasset LLC 6-O-Substituted-2-amino-purine nucleoside phosphoramidates
US8455451B2 (en) 2009-09-21 2013-06-04 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 2'-fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
PL2552930T3 (en) 2010-03-31 2016-02-29 Gilead Pharmasset Llc Crystalline (s)-isopropyl 2-(((s)-(((2r,3r,4r,5r)-5-(2,4-dioxo-3,4-dihydropyrimidin-1-(2h)-yl)-4-fluoro-3-hydroxy-4-methyltetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methoxy)(phenoxy)phosphoryl)amino)propanoate
TW201201815A (en) 2010-05-28 2012-01-16 Gilead Sciences Inc 1'-substituted-carba-nucleoside prodrugs for antiviral treatment
TW201305185A (en) * 2010-09-13 2013-02-01 Gilead Sciences Inc 2'-fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
CN103842369A (en) 2011-03-31 2014-06-04 埃迪尼克斯医药公司 Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
WO2012142075A1 (en) 2011-04-13 2012-10-18 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 2'-azido substituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
PE20140522A1 (en) 2011-04-13 2014-05-03 Merck Sharp & Dohme DERIVATIVES OF NUCLEOSIDES 2'- SUBSTITUTED AND METHODS OF USE OF THE SAME FOR THE TREATMENT OF VIRAL DISEASES
WO2012142093A2 (en) 2011-04-13 2012-10-18 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 2'-cyano substituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
US9408863B2 (en) 2011-07-13 2016-08-09 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 5′-substituted nucleoside analogs and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
US9416154B2 (en) 2011-07-13 2016-08-16 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 5′-substituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
TW201329096A (en) 2011-09-12 2013-07-16 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Inc Substituted carbonyloxymethylphosphoramidate compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
AR089650A1 (en) 2011-10-14 2014-09-10 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Inc PHOSPHATES 3,5-REPLACED CYCLES OF PURINE NUCLEOTIDE COMPOUNDS AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS FOR THE TREATMENT OF VIRAL INFECTIONS
AU2013221571A1 (en) 2012-02-14 2014-08-28 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Spiro [2.4] heptanes for treatment of Flaviviridae infections
EP2852604B1 (en) 2012-05-22 2017-04-12 Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC 3',5'-cyclic phosphoramidate prodrugs for hcv infection
EP2852605B1 (en) 2012-05-22 2018-01-31 Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC 3',5'-cyclic phosphate prodrugs for hcv infection
MX355708B (en) 2012-05-22 2018-04-27 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc D-amino acid compounds for liver disease.
ES2597757T3 (en) 2012-05-25 2017-01-20 Janssen Sciences Ireland Uc Uraciles pyroxexetane nucleosides
US9192621B2 (en) 2012-09-27 2015-11-24 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc Esters and malonates of SATE prodrugs
PE20151318A1 (en) 2012-10-08 2015-10-03 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Inc 2'-NUCLEOSIDE CHLORINE ANALOGS FOR HCV INFECTION
US9457039B2 (en) 2012-10-17 2016-10-04 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 2′-disubstituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof for the treatment of viral diseases
EP2909209B1 (en) 2012-10-17 2022-08-03 Merck Sharp & Dohme LLC 2'-cyano substituted nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof for treatment of viral diseases
WO2014066239A1 (en) 2012-10-22 2014-05-01 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 2',4'-bridged nucleosides for hcv infection
US9211300B2 (en) 2012-12-19 2015-12-15 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 4′-fluoro nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
WO2014137926A1 (en) 2013-03-04 2014-09-12 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3'-deoxy nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
WO2014137930A1 (en) 2013-03-04 2014-09-12 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Thiophosphate nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
EP2970357A1 (en) 2013-03-13 2016-01-20 IDENIX Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Amino acid phosphoramidate pronucleotides of 2'-cyano, azido and amino nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
US9187515B2 (en) 2013-04-01 2015-11-17 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 2′,4′-fluoro nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
US10005779B2 (en) 2013-06-05 2018-06-26 Idenix Pharmaceuticals Llc 1′,4′-thio nucleosides for the treatment of HCV
WO2015017713A1 (en) 2013-08-01 2015-02-05 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. D-amino acid phosphoramidate pronucleotides of halogeno pyrimidine compounds for liver disease
EP3131914B1 (en) 2014-04-16 2023-05-10 Idenix Pharmaceuticals LLC 3'-substituted methyl or alkynyl nucleosides for the treatment of hcv
US9856263B2 (en) 2014-04-28 2018-01-02 Pfizer Inc. Heteroaromatic compounds and their use as dopamine D1 ligands
EP3265102A4 (en) 2015-03-06 2018-12-05 ATEA Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Beta-d-2'-deoxy-2'alpha-fluoro-2'-beta-c-substituted-2-modified-n6-substituted purine nucleotides for hcv treatment
WO2018013937A1 (en) 2016-07-14 2018-01-18 Atea Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Beta-d-2'-deoxy-2'-alpha-fluoro-2'-beta-c-substituted-4'-fluoro-n6-substituted-6-amino-2-substituted purine nucleotides for the treatment of hepatitis c virus infection
EA037868B1 (en) 2016-09-07 2021-05-28 Атеа Фармасьютикалс, Инк. 2'-substituted-n6-substituted purine nucleotides for rna virus treatment
WO2018119371A1 (en) * 2016-12-23 2018-06-28 Temple University - Of The Commonwealth System Of Higher Education Anti-flaviviridae activity of anti-retroviral non-nucleoside (nnrtis) and nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors (nnrtis)
WO2018144640A1 (en) 2017-02-01 2018-08-09 Atea Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Nucleotide hemi-sulfate salt for the treatment of hepatitis c virus
WO2019200005A1 (en) 2018-04-10 2019-10-17 Atea Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Treatment of hcv infected patients with cirrhosis
CN113214262B (en) * 2020-02-05 2023-07-07 华创合成制药股份有限公司 Compound containing guanidine group, and preparation method and application thereof
US10874687B1 (en) 2020-02-27 2020-12-29 Atea Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Highly active compounds against COVID-19
US11318118B1 (en) 2021-04-05 2022-05-03 Tactical Therapeutics Inc. Methods and compositions for treating SARS-CoV-2 infection using carboxyamidotriazole orotate

Citations (28)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4816570A (en) 1982-11-30 1989-03-28 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Biologically reversible phosphate and phosphonate protective groups
US4968788A (en) 1986-04-04 1990-11-06 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Biologically reversible phosphate and phosphonate protective gruops
WO1991019721A1 (en) 1990-06-13 1991-12-26 Arnold Glazier Phosphorous produgs
US5663159A (en) 1990-09-14 1997-09-02 Institute Of Organic Chemistry And Biochemistry Of The Academy Of Sciences Of The Czech Republic Prodrugs of phosphonates
WO2000056734A1 (en) 1999-03-20 2000-09-28 Aventis Cropscience Gmbh Bicyclic heterocycles, method for producing them and their use as herbicides and pharmaceutical agents
WO2001032153A2 (en) 1999-11-04 2001-05-10 Shire Biochem Inc. Method for the treatment or prevention of flaviviridae viral infection using nucleoside analogues
WO2001060315A2 (en) 2000-02-18 2001-08-23 Shire Biochem Inc. Method for the treatment or prevention of flavivirus infections using nucleoside analogues
US6312662B1 (en) 1998-03-06 2001-11-06 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Prodrugs phosphorus-containing compounds
WO2001090121A2 (en) 2000-05-23 2001-11-29 Idenix (Cayman) Limited Methods and compositions for treating hepatitis c virus
WO2002018404A2 (en) 2000-08-30 2002-03-07 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Nucleoside derivatives for the treatment of hepatitis c
WO2002032920A2 (en) 2000-10-18 2002-04-25 Pharmasset Limited Modified nucleosides for treatment of viral infections and abnormal cellular proliferation
WO2002057287A2 (en) 2001-01-22 2002-07-25 Merck & Co., Inc. Nucleoside derivatives as inhibitors of rna-dependent rna viral polymerase
US20040006002A1 (en) 2001-09-28 2004-01-08 Jean-Pierre Sommadossi Methods and compositions for treating flaviviruses and pestiviruses using 4'-modified nucleoside
WO2004046331A2 (en) 2002-11-15 2004-06-03 Idenix (Cayman) Limited 2’-branched nucleosides and flaviviridae mutation
WO2006031725A2 (en) 2004-09-14 2006-03-23 Pharmasset, Inc. Preparation of 2'­fluoro-2'- alkyl- substituted or other optionally substituted ribofuranosyl pyrimidines and purines and their derivatives
WO2006065335A2 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-06-22 Merck & Co., Inc. Fluorinated pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine nucleosides for the treatment of rna-dependent rna viral infection
WO2006121820A1 (en) 2005-05-05 2006-11-16 Valeant Research & Development Phosphoramidate prodrugs for treatment of viral infection
WO2007027248A2 (en) 2005-05-16 2007-03-08 Valeant Research & Development 3', 5' - cyclic nucleoside analogues for treatment of hcv
WO2007056170A2 (en) 2005-11-02 2007-05-18 Bayer Healthcare Ag Pyrrolo[2,1-f] [1,2,4] triazin-4-ylamines igf-1r kinase inhibitors for the treatment of cancer and other hyperproliferative diseases
WO2008082601A2 (en) 2006-12-28 2008-07-10 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
WO2008085508A2 (en) 2007-01-05 2008-07-17 Merck & Co., Inc. Nucleoside aryl phosphoramidates for the treatment of rna-dependent rna viral infection
WO2008089105A2 (en) 2007-01-12 2008-07-24 Biocryst Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antiviral nucleoside analogs
WO2008116064A2 (en) 2007-03-21 2008-09-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Fused heterocyclic compounds useful for the treatment of proliferative, allergic, autoimmune or inflammatory diseases
WO2008141079A1 (en) 2007-05-10 2008-11-20 Biocryst Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tetrahydrofuro [3 4-d] dioxolane compounds for use in the treatment of viral infections and cancer
WO2009132123A1 (en) 2008-04-23 2009-10-29 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
WO2010002877A2 (en) 2008-07-03 2010-01-07 Biota Scientific Management Bycyclic nucleosides and nucleotides as therapeutic agents
WO2011035231A1 (en) * 2009-09-21 2011-03-24 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 2' -fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
WO2011035250A1 (en) * 2009-09-21 2011-03-24 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Processes and intermediates for the preparation of 1'-substituted carba-nucleoside analogs

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008005542A2 (en) 2006-07-07 2008-01-10 Gilead Sciences, Inc., Antiviral phosphinate compounds
TWI598358B (en) * 2009-05-20 2017-09-11 基利法瑪席特有限責任公司 Nucleoside phosphoramidates

Patent Citations (31)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4816570A (en) 1982-11-30 1989-03-28 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Biologically reversible phosphate and phosphonate protective groups
US4968788A (en) 1986-04-04 1990-11-06 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Biologically reversible phosphate and phosphonate protective gruops
WO1991019721A1 (en) 1990-06-13 1991-12-26 Arnold Glazier Phosphorous produgs
US5663159A (en) 1990-09-14 1997-09-02 Institute Of Organic Chemistry And Biochemistry Of The Academy Of Sciences Of The Czech Republic Prodrugs of phosphonates
US5792756A (en) 1990-09-14 1998-08-11 Institute Of Organic Chemistry And Biochemistry Of The Academy Of Sciences Of The Czech Republic Prodrugs of phosphonates
US6312662B1 (en) 1998-03-06 2001-11-06 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Prodrugs phosphorus-containing compounds
WO2000056734A1 (en) 1999-03-20 2000-09-28 Aventis Cropscience Gmbh Bicyclic heterocycles, method for producing them and their use as herbicides and pharmaceutical agents
WO2001032153A2 (en) 1999-11-04 2001-05-10 Shire Biochem Inc. Method for the treatment or prevention of flaviviridae viral infection using nucleoside analogues
WO2001060315A2 (en) 2000-02-18 2001-08-23 Shire Biochem Inc. Method for the treatment or prevention of flavivirus infections using nucleoside analogues
WO2001090121A2 (en) 2000-05-23 2001-11-29 Idenix (Cayman) Limited Methods and compositions for treating hepatitis c virus
WO2002018404A2 (en) 2000-08-30 2002-03-07 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Nucleoside derivatives for the treatment of hepatitis c
WO2002032920A2 (en) 2000-10-18 2002-04-25 Pharmasset Limited Modified nucleosides for treatment of viral infections and abnormal cellular proliferation
WO2002057287A2 (en) 2001-01-22 2002-07-25 Merck & Co., Inc. Nucleoside derivatives as inhibitors of rna-dependent rna viral polymerase
WO2002057425A2 (en) 2001-01-22 2002-07-25 Merck & Co., Inc. Nucleoside derivatives as inhibitors of rna-dependent rna viral polymerase
US20040006002A1 (en) 2001-09-28 2004-01-08 Jean-Pierre Sommadossi Methods and compositions for treating flaviviruses and pestiviruses using 4'-modified nucleoside
WO2004046331A2 (en) 2002-11-15 2004-06-03 Idenix (Cayman) Limited 2’-branched nucleosides and flaviviridae mutation
WO2006031725A2 (en) 2004-09-14 2006-03-23 Pharmasset, Inc. Preparation of 2'­fluoro-2'- alkyl- substituted or other optionally substituted ribofuranosyl pyrimidines and purines and their derivatives
WO2006065335A2 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-06-22 Merck & Co., Inc. Fluorinated pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine nucleosides for the treatment of rna-dependent rna viral infection
WO2006121820A1 (en) 2005-05-05 2006-11-16 Valeant Research & Development Phosphoramidate prodrugs for treatment of viral infection
WO2007027248A2 (en) 2005-05-16 2007-03-08 Valeant Research & Development 3', 5' - cyclic nucleoside analogues for treatment of hcv
WO2007056170A2 (en) 2005-11-02 2007-05-18 Bayer Healthcare Ag Pyrrolo[2,1-f] [1,2,4] triazin-4-ylamines igf-1r kinase inhibitors for the treatment of cancer and other hyperproliferative diseases
WO2008082601A2 (en) 2006-12-28 2008-07-10 Idenix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of viral infections
WO2008085508A2 (en) 2007-01-05 2008-07-17 Merck & Co., Inc. Nucleoside aryl phosphoramidates for the treatment of rna-dependent rna viral infection
WO2008089105A2 (en) 2007-01-12 2008-07-24 Biocryst Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antiviral nucleoside analogs
WO2008116064A2 (en) 2007-03-21 2008-09-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Fused heterocyclic compounds useful for the treatment of proliferative, allergic, autoimmune or inflammatory diseases
WO2008141079A1 (en) 2007-05-10 2008-11-20 Biocryst Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tetrahydrofuro [3 4-d] dioxolane compounds for use in the treatment of viral infections and cancer
WO2009132123A1 (en) 2008-04-23 2009-10-29 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
WO2009132135A1 (en) 2008-04-23 2009-10-29 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1' -substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
WO2010002877A2 (en) 2008-07-03 2010-01-07 Biota Scientific Management Bycyclic nucleosides and nucleotides as therapeutic agents
WO2011035231A1 (en) * 2009-09-21 2011-03-24 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 2' -fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
WO2011035250A1 (en) * 2009-09-21 2011-03-24 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Processes and intermediates for the preparation of 1'-substituted carba-nucleoside analogs

Non-Patent Citations (49)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients", 1986
"McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Chemical Terms", 1984, MCGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY
"The Chemistry of Heterocyclic Compounds, A Series of Monosraohs", vol. 13, 14,, 1950, JOHN WILEY & SONS
ACS MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY LETTERS, vol. 1, 2010, pages 286
BENZARIA ET AL., J MED. CHEM., vol. 39, 1996, pages 4958
BIOORGANIC AND MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY LETTERS, vol. 17, 2007, pages 2452
BOYER, N. ET AL., J HEPATOL., vol. 32, 2000, pages 98 - 112
BROWN, A. B., EXPERT OPIN. INVESTIG. DRUGS, vol. 18, 2009, pages 709 - 725
BUNDGAARD, HANS: "Textbook of Drug Design and Development", 1991, HARWOOD ACADEMIC PUBLISHERS, article "Design and Application of Prodrugs", pages: 113 - 191
BYMOCK ET AL., ANTIVIRAL CHEMISTRY & CHEMOTHERAPY, vol. 11, no. 2, 2000, pages 79 - 95
CALISHER ET AL., J. GEN. VIROL., vol. 70, 1993, pages 37 - 43
CARBOHYDRATE RESEARCH, vol. 331, no. 1, 2001, pages 77 - 82
CARROLL ET AL., ANTIMICROBIAL AGENTS CHEMOTHERAPY, 2009, pages 926
DE CLERCQ, E., J. CLIN. VIROL., vol. 22, 2001, pages 73 - 89
DE CLERCQ, E., J. PHARMACOL. EXP.THER., vol. 297, 2001, pages 1 - 10
DE FRANCESCO, R. ET AL., ANTIVIRAL RESEARCH, vol. 58, 2003, pages 1 - 16
DELAMBERT ET AL., J MED. CHEM., vol. 37, 1994, pages 498
DI BESCEGLIE, A.M., BACON, B. R., SCIENTIFIC AMERICAN, October 1999 (1999-10-01), pages 80 - 85
DOMINGO ET AL., GENE, vol. 40, 1985, pages 1 - 8
ELIEL, E., WILEN, S.: "Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds", 1994, JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC.
EUROPEAN JOURNAL OF MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY, vol. 44, 2009, pages 3769
FARQUHAR ET AL., J. PHARM. SCI., vol. 72, 1983, pages 324
FUKIMOTO ET AL., HEPATOLOGY, vol. 24, 1996, pages 1351 - 4
GORDON, C. P. ET AL., J. MED. CHEM., vol. 48, 2005, pages 1 - 20
HETEROCYCLES, vol. 34, no. 3, 1992, pages 569 - 74
J CHEM. SOC. PERKIN TRANS., vol. 1, no. 3, 1985, pages 621 - 30
J. AM. CHEM. SOC., vol. 82, 1960, pages 5566
J. CHEM. SOC. PERKIN TRANS., vol. 1, no. 2, 1984, pages 229 - 38
J. CHEM. SOC. PERKIN TRANS., vol. 1, no. 24, 1999, pages 2929 - 2936
J. MED. CHEM., vol. 29, no. 11, 1986, pages 2231 - 5
J. MED. CHEM., vol. 38, 1985, pages 3941
JOURNAL OFMEDICINAL CHEMISTRY, vol. 49, 2006, pages 6614
KHAMNEI, TORRENCE, J. MED. CHEM., vol. 39, 1996, pages 4109 - 4115
MARADPOUR, D. ET AL., NAT. REV. MICRO., vol. 5, no. 6, 2007, pages 453 - 463
MARTELL ET AL., J. VIROL., vol. 66, 1992, pages 3225 - 9
MCGUIGAN ET AL., J. MED. CHEM., vol. 36, 1993, pages 1048 - 1052
MIGLIACCIO ET AL., J. BIOL. CHEM., 2003, pages 926
MITCHELL ET AL., J CHEM. SOC. PERKIN TRANS., 1992, pages 12345
MOENNIG, V., ADV. VIR. RES., vol. 48, 1992, pages 53 - 98
NEUMANN ET AL., SCIENCE, vol. 282, 1998, pages 103 - 7
NUCLEOSIDES & NUCLEOTIDES, vol. 15, no. 1-3, 1996, pages 793 - 807
ORGANIC LETTERS, vol. 3, no. 6, 2001, pages 839 - 842
ORGANIC LETTERS, vol. 6, 2003, pages 807
PAQUETTE, LEO A.: "Principles of Modem Heterocyclic Chemistry", 1968, W.A. BENJAMIN
PUECH ET AL., ANTIVIRAL RES., vol. 22, 1993, pages 155 - 174
SCHUL ET AL., J. INFECTIOUS DIS., vol. 195, 2007, pages 665 - 74
SCOTT, L. J. ET AL., DRUGS, vol. 62, 2002, pages 507 - 556
TETRAHEDRON LETTERS, vol. 35, no. 30, 1994, pages 5339 - 42
THEODORA W. GREENE: "Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry", 1991, JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC.

Cited By (42)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8853171B2 (en) 2008-04-23 2014-10-07 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1′-substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
USRE46762E1 (en) 2008-04-23 2018-03-27 Gilead Sciences, Inc 1′-substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
US10988498B2 (en) 2009-09-21 2021-04-27 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Processes and intermediates for the preparation of 1′-substituted carba-nucleoside analogs
US9090642B2 (en) 2010-07-19 2015-07-28 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for the preparation of diasteromerically pure phosphoramidate prodrugs
US9487544B2 (en) 2010-07-19 2016-11-08 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for the preparation of diasteromerically pure phosphoramidate prodrugs
US10065958B2 (en) 2010-07-22 2018-09-04 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods and compounds for treating Paramyxoviridae virus infections
US11492353B2 (en) 2010-07-22 2022-11-08 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods and compounds for treating Paramyxoviridae virus infections
US10696679B2 (en) 2010-07-22 2020-06-30 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods and compounds for treating paramyxoviridae virus infections
US9296769B2 (en) 2011-08-16 2016-03-29 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Tenofovir alafenamide hemifumarate
US11266666B2 (en) 2014-10-29 2022-03-08 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating Filoviridae virus infections
US9724360B2 (en) 2014-10-29 2017-08-08 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating Filoviridae virus infections
US11344565B2 (en) 2014-10-29 2022-05-31 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for the preparation of ribosides
US10695357B2 (en) 2014-10-29 2020-06-30 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating filoviridae virus infections
US9949994B2 (en) 2014-10-29 2018-04-24 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating Filoviridae virus infections
US10251898B2 (en) 2014-10-29 2019-04-09 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating Filoviridae virus infections
US11628181B2 (en) 2014-12-26 2023-04-18 Emory University N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
US10251904B2 (en) 2015-09-16 2019-04-09 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating arenaviridae and coronaviridae virus infections
US10695361B2 (en) 2015-09-16 2020-06-30 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating arenaviridae and coronaviridae virus infections
US11382926B2 (en) 2015-09-16 2022-07-12 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating Arenaviridae and Coronaviridae virus infections
US11007208B2 (en) 2015-09-16 2021-05-18 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating arenaviridae and coronaviridae virus infections
JP2019521149A (en) * 2016-07-14 2019-07-25 エフ．ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲーＦ． Ｈｏｆｆｍａｎｎ−Ｌａ Ｒｏｃｈｅ Ａｋｔｉｅｎｇｅｓｅｌｌｓｃｈａｆｔ 6,7-Dihydro-4H-pyrazolo [1,5-a] pyrazine compounds and 6,7-dihydro-4H-triazolo [1,5-a] pyrazine compounds for the treatment of infectious diseases
JP7051804B2 (en) 2016-07-14 2022-04-11 エフ．ホフマン－ラ ロシュ アーゲー 6,7-dihydro-4H-pyrazolo [1,5-a] pyrazine compound and 6,7-dihydro-4H-triazolo [1,5-a] pyrazine compound for the treatment of infectious diseases
US11260070B2 (en) 2017-03-14 2022-03-01 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of treating feline coronavirus infections
US10682368B2 (en) 2017-03-14 2020-06-16 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of treating feline coronavirus infections
US10836787B2 (en) 2017-05-01 2020-11-17 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Crystalline forms of (S)-2-ethylbutyl 2-(((S)-(((2R,3S,4R,5R)-5- (4-aminopyrrolo[2,1-f] [1,2,4]triazin-7-yl)-5-cyano-3,4-dihydroxytetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methoxy)(phenoxy) phosphoryl)amino)propanoate
US11597742B2 (en) 2017-05-01 2023-03-07 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Crystalline forms of (S)-2-ethylbutyl 2-(((S)-(((2R,3S,4R,5R)-5-(4-aminopyrrolo[2,1-f] [1,2,4]triazin-7-yl)-5-cyano-3,4-dihydroxytetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methoxy) (phenoxy) phosphoryl)amino)propanoate
US10675296B2 (en) 2017-07-11 2020-06-09 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compositions comprising an RNA polymerase inhibitor and cyclodextrin for treating viral infections
US11266681B2 (en) 2017-07-11 2022-03-08 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compositions comprising an RNA polymerase inhibitor and cyclodextrin for treating viral infections
US11903959B2 (en) 2017-12-07 2024-02-20 Emory University N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
US11331331B2 (en) 2017-12-07 2022-05-17 Emory University N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
US11660307B2 (en) 2020-01-27 2023-05-30 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating SARS CoV-2 infections
US11613553B2 (en) 2020-03-12 2023-03-28 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of preparing 1′-cyano nucleosides
US11701372B2 (en) 2020-04-06 2023-07-18 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Inhalation formulations of 1'-cyano substituted carba-nucleoside analogs
US11903953B2 (en) 2020-05-29 2024-02-20 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Remdesivir treatment methods
US11491169B2 (en) 2020-05-29 2022-11-08 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Remdesivir treatment methods
US11939347B2 (en) 2020-06-24 2024-03-26 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1′-cyano nucleoside analogs and uses thereof
US11814406B2 (en) 2020-08-27 2023-11-14 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US11926645B2 (en) 2020-08-27 2024-03-12 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
WO2022142477A1 (en) * 2020-12-30 2022-07-07 Southern University Of Science And Technology Methods and modified nucleosides for treating coronavirus infections
US11780844B2 (en) 2022-03-02 2023-10-10 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US11845755B2 (en) 2022-03-02 2023-12-19 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US11851438B2 (en) 2022-03-02 2023-12-26 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1′-cyano nucleoside analogs and methods for treatment of viral infections

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US7973013B2 (en) 2011-07-05
US20110070194A1 (en) 2011-03-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2020202600B2 (en) 2&#39; -fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
US8455451B2 (en) 2&#39;-fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
US7973013B2 (en) 2&#39;-fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
CA2807496C (en) 2&#39;-fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
OA16347A (en) 2&#39;-fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment.
OA16370A (en) Mass transfert column.
EA046452B1 (en) 2&#39;-FLUORINE-SUBSTITUTED CARBANUCLEOSIDE ANALOGUES FOR ANTIVIRAL TREATMENT
OA16229A (en) 2&#39;-Fluoro substituted carba-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment.
BR112012006261B1 (en) ANALOG COMPOUNDS OF 2&#39;-FLUORINE SUBSTITUTED CARBANUCLEOSIDE, USEFUL COMPOUND FOR THE PREPARATION OF THE SAME, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION AND USE OF ANALOG COMPOUNDS OF 2&#39;-FLUORIDE SUBSTITUTED CARBANUCLEOSIDE
BR122021012877B1 (en) ANALOGUE COMPOUNDS OF 2&#39;-FLUOR REPLACED CARBANUCEOSID, USE OF THE SAME AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION INCLUDING THEM

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 11715095

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 11715095

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1